Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/304
Nächste Seite
1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-3 M2007
© Saab Automobile AB 2006
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
Safety 11
Security 47
9-3 Convertible 61
Instruments and controls 81
Interior equipment 117
Starting and driving 149
Car care 201
Customer Assistance and Information 273
Technical data 279
Index 299
93_U S_M 07.book Page 1 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
1

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Inhalt der Seiten


  • Page 1

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 1 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    1

    Owner’s Manual
    Saab 9-3 M2007
    Safety
    Security
    9-3 Convertible
    Instruments and controls
    Interior equipment
    Starting and driving
    Car care
    Customer Assistance and Information
    Technical data
    Index
    © Saab Automobile AB 2006
    Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
    Printed in Sweden

    11
    47
    61
    81
    117
    149
    201
    273
    279
    299



  • Page 2

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 2 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    2

    Introduction
    This manual provides practical guidance on
    driving and caring for your Saab.
    Although this manual describes the most
    important differences between model variants, it does not specify the equipment or
    features included on individual models.
    Importation and distribution of Saab automobiles, spare parts and accessories are
    handled exclusively by Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    in the United States and by General Motors
    of Canada Limited in Canada.
    We recommend that you read through the
    manual before taking the car out for the first
    time and keep it in the car for future reference.

    To find a specific item, use the overviews
    given on page 3–6. A list of content is given
    at the beginning of each section of the
    manual, and there is also a comprehensive
    index at the back of the book.
    Supplied with the car is a Warranty and Service Record booklet which contains important warranty information and specifies the
    regular maintenance to be carried out. Also
    included is a Quick Reference Guide, an
    Infotainment System manual, tire warranties and (U.S. customers), a dealer directory
    with Roadside Assistance Program information.

    WARNING

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all
    cars (can depend on model variant, engine
    variant, market specification, options or
    accessories).
    If you have any questions concerning your
    car, its equipment, the warranty conditions,
    etc., your Saab dealer will be pleased to
    help, or you may call the Saab Customer
    Assistance Center in the U.S. at 1-800-9559007 or email them at saabcrm@saabusa.com. In Canada, please
    contact the Saab Customer Assistance
    Center at 1-800-263-1999.
    Enjoy the road ahead!
    Saab Automobile AB

    Failure to heed warnings may cause
    personal injury.

    NOTICE
    NOTICE texts warns of potential damage
    to the car if the recommendations are not
    followed.
    Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
    improvement, we retain the right to incorporate modifications and to alter specifications
    during production without prior notice.

    Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
    any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
    exchange parts or accessories that are not
    approved by Saab Automobile AB.



  • Page 3

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 3 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    3

    Instrument panel

    Fuel gauge __________________
    Odometer and trip meter ________
    Speedometer ________________
    Tachometer __________________
    Temperature gauge____________
    Turbo gauge _________________
    Warning and indicator lights _____
    Saab Information Display (SID)___

    89
    90
    87
    87
    88
    88
    82
    89

    Cruise Control ___________ 169
    Direction indicators _______ 100
    High/low beam control stalk
    98

    Changing bulbs __________ 219
    Front fog lights___________ 99
    Headlight levelling ________ 97
    High/low beam __________ 98
    Parking lights____________ 97
    Rear fog light____________ 99

    Ashtray _____________________
    Cigarette lighter _______________

    134
    134

    Replacing wiper blades ___
    Washers and wipers______
    Washer fluid ____________

    217
    101
    218

    Automatic climate control __
    Car care and maintenance _
    Hazard warning lights_____
    Seat heating, ACC _______

    106
    268
    100
    113



  • Page 4

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 4 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    4

    Exterior
    Anti-corrosion treatment ___
    Body __________________
    Service program _________
    Moonroof_______________
    Touching up paintwork ____
    Washing _______________
    Waxing and polishing _____

    Maximum loads _______________
    Mounting holes for roof carriers ___
    Roof load ____________________

    280
    192
    192

    265
    264
    274
    128
    264
    261
    264

    Brake lights _____________ 227
    Changing bulbs __________ 219
    Light switches ___________ 97
    Taillights _______________ 227

    Folding down the rear seat _
    Lighting ________________
    Load-through hatch_______
    Spare wheel ____________
    Tools __________________
    Trunk __________________

    136
    227
    138
    140
    140
    136

    Towing_________________ 195
    Towing hook eyes ________ 195
    Towing a trailer __________ 188

    Braking _____________________
    Changing wheels ______________
    Spare wheel _________________
    Tire pressure ________________
    Tires _______________________
    Wheels _____________________
    Winter driving ________________

    170
    257
    254
    292
    241
    290
    185

    Hood _______________________
    Washing the engine bay_________

    202
    261

    Changing bulbs _________
    Dipswitch ______________
    Direction indicators_______
    Front lights _____________
    Headlight levelling (xenon) _
    Headlight switches _______
    Headlight washers _______

    219
    97
    100
    221
    97
    97
    218

    Central locking __________
    Child safety locks ________
    Lock buttons ____________
    Trunk lock ______________

    48
    52
    48
    51

    Economical motoring _____
    Fuel filler door __________
    Fuel gauge _____________
    Fuel grade _____________
    Refueling ______________

    183
    157
    89
    285
    157



  • Page 5

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 5 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    5

    Interior

    Interior rearview mirror _________
    Vanity mirror _________________
    Door mirrors__________________

    123
    132
    122

    Airbag _________________ 32
    Steering wheel adjustment _ 118
    Steering _______________ 288

    Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___
    Interior light switches ___________
    Moonroof ____________________

    232
    131
    128

    Airbag_________________
    Child safety locks ________
    Child seats _____________
    Safety belt care _________
    Safety belts ____________

    32
    52
    24
    260
    12

    Glove box ______________
    Storage compartments____

    134
    134

    Automatic transmission ___
    Changing gears _________
    Manual transmission _____

    163
    162
    162

    Fuses _________________ 234

    Electric windows _________ 119

    Child seats ________________
    Folding down the rear seat ____
    Rear seat__________________
    Safety belts ________________
    Seat adjustment ____________
    Seat heating _______________
    Upholstery care_____________

    24
    136
    136
    12
    18
    113
    260

    Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____
    Break-In Period _______________
    Driving in hot/cold climates ______
    Ignition switch ________________
    Parking brake_________________
    Parking _____________________
    Starting the engine ____________

    134
    161
    185
    150
    177
    177
    152



  • Page 6

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 6 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    6

    Engine bay, 4-cyl

    Engine: description ____________
    Engine: technical data __________
    Important considerations for driving
    Oil grade and viscosity__________

    Color code______________
    Engine number __________
    Gearbox number _________
    Warning labels __________
    Vehicle identification number

    293
    293
    293
    8
    293

    Alternator_______________
    Drive belt _______________
    Exhaust emission control __
    Ignition system __________
    Simple troubleshooting (ACC)
    Spark plugs _____________
    Turbo gauge ____________

    216
    216
    155
    286
    268
    286
    88

    202
    283
    154
    284

    Engine oil: checking level __ 207

    Automatic transmission _________
    Transmission: technical data _____
    Manual transmission ___________

    163
    287
    162

    Power steering________________
    Fluid: checking/topping up _______

    212
    212

    Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 209
    Driving in hot climates __________ 187
    Radiator_____________________ 283
    Temperature gauge ____________
    88

    ABS brakes_____________
    Brake pads _____________
    Brake system ___________
    Brake fluid______________

    170
    211
    289
    211

    Changing a fuse _________
    Fuse table _____________
    Fuses _________________
    Relays ________________

    234
    239
    234
    239

    Topping-up fluid _________
    Wash/wipe stalk switch____
    Washer fluid ____________
    Washer jets ____________

    218
    101
    218
    218

    Battery ______________________
    Battery charge ________________
    Jump starting _________________

    213
    213
    198



  • Page 7

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 7 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    7

    Engine bay, 2.8 V6

    Engine: description ____________
    Engine oil: topping up __________
    Oil grade and viscosity__________
    Engine: technical data __________
    Important considerations
    for driving ___________________

    202
    207
    284
    283

    293
    293
    293
    8
    293

    Exhaust emission control __
    Drive belt _______________
    Simple troubleshooting (ACC)
    Alternator_______________
    Turbo gauge ____________
    Spark plugs _____________
    Ignition system __________

    155
    216
    268
    216
    88
    286
    286

    Automatic transmission _________
    Manual gearbox_______________
    Gearbox: technical data_________

    163
    162
    287

    Engine oil: checking level________

    283
    209
    187
    88

    ABS brakes_____________
    Brake pads _____________
    Brake system ___________
    Brake fluid______________

    171
    289
    170
    211

    Changing a fuse _________
    Fuses _________________
    Relays ________________
    Fuse table______________

    236
    234
    239
    236

    Wash/wipe stalk switch____
    Topping-up fluid _________
    Washer jets_____________
    Washer fluid ____________

    101
    218
    218
    218

    Battery ______________________
    Battery charge ________________
    Jump starting _________________

    213
    213
    198

    154

    Power steering___________ 212
    Fluid: checking/topping up__ 212

    Vehicle identification
    number ________________
    Colour code _____________
    Engine number __________
    Warning labels___________
    Gearbox number _________

    Cooling system, coolant capacity__
    Coolant: checking/topping-up ____
    Driving in hot climates __________
    Temperature gauge ____________

    207



  • Page 8

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 8 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    8

    Warning labels
    Radiator fan:
    Radiator fan may start at any
    time.

    A/C system:
    Refrigerant at high pressure.
    Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C
    system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be
    serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult dealer manual.
    The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
    Charge: 680 g R134a.
    Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG oil SP-10 alt.
    Saab oil 4759106

    LEVEL INDICATOR
    DARK
    CLEAR

    OK
    LOW

    Maintenance Free
    12V 60Ah 580A (EN)

    000 A-12102-EP

    P/N 127 93 955

    Battery:






    No sparks, flames or smoking
    Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury
    Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns
    Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast
    Do not tip battery. Do not open battery








    NO SPARKS, FLAMES OR SMOKING
    SHIELD EYES
    KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN
    ACID
    SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
    EXPLOSIVE GAS

    CANADA
    NETTOYER LE BOUCHON
    DE REMPLISSAGE
    AVANT DE L’ENLEVER.
    UTILISER SEULEMENT
    DU LIQUIDE DOT 4 PROVENANT D’UN CONTENANT SCELLÉ.

    Coolant:
    Never open when engine hot!



  • Page 9

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 9 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9
    Jack
    • Jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting
    tire snow chains.
    • Vehicle must be level and jack must be placed on firm
    and level ground.
    • Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is jacked up.
    JACKING INSTRUCTION

    EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS





    Children can be killed or serious injured by the air bag.
    The back seat is the safest place for children.
    Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.
    Always use seat belts and child restraints.

    Contact a Saab dealer if a
    xenon headlight requires
    replacement.
    This label is only found on
    cars with xenon headlights.

    1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.
    2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to be
    changed.
    3 Crank jack so that vehicle begins to lift.
    4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel bolts
    one-half turn.
    5 Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground. Loosen
    wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
    6 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so
    wheel is not loose.
    7 Lower vehicle. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
    sequence.

    Changing wheels:
    Use only on specified vehicle. Safe working load
    2425 lbs. (1100 kg). Use on level firm ground only. Do
    not get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack,
    use vehicle support stands. No persons are to remain in
    the vehicle.



  • Page 10

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 10 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    10
    Example of symbols that can be found in your car

    No sparks,
    flames or
    smoking

    Buckle up

    Headlights

    Windshield
    wipers

    Coolant temperature

    Radiator fan

    Refer to
    the Owner’s
    Manual

    Airbag

    Direction
    indicators

    Windshield
    washers

    No charge to
    battery

    Fuel

    Shield eyes

    Never place a
    rear-facing
    child seat in
    this seat

    Parking lights

    Defroster

    Foot brake

    Keep out of
    reach of
    children

    Electric
    windows

    Hazard warning lights

    Rear window
    heating

    Coolant level

    Battery acid
    contains sulphuric acid

    Deactivating
    of rear window
    switches

    Front fog
    lights

    Cabin fan

    Engine oil
    pressure

    Risk of
    explosive gas

    Central
    locking, lock

    Rear fog light

    Central
    locking,
    unlock
    Trunk lid,
    opening

    ABS brakes

    Electronic
    Stability
    Program



  • Page 11

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 11 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety

    11

    Safety
    Safety belts ___________
    Seats ________________
    Head restraints ________
    Child safety ___________
    Airbag________________

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    12
    18
    23
    24
    32



  • Page 12

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 12 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    12

    Safety

    Safety belts
    WARNING
    • Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
    before driving off so that you can pay
    full attention to the traffic.
    • Safety belts must be worn at all times
    by all occupants.
    • Child safety, see page 24.
    • Check that the locking tongue is properly locked in the belt lock.
    • In the event of a crash, a rear-seat
    passenger not wearing a safety belt
    will be thrown forward against the
    front-seat backrests. The stresses
    imposed on the front seat passengers
    and belts are multiplied and can result
    in needless injury or even death for all
    car occupants.

    Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are
    provided for all seats.
    The results of studies show that it is equally
    important to wear safety belts in the rear
    seat as in the front seats.

    Safety belt reminder
    When the ignition is switched on, the safety
    belt reminder will come on if the driver or/
    and the front seat passenger has not buckled up.
    The reminder for the driver is in the main
    instrument and for the front seat passenger
    on the instrument panel.
    The reminder for the driver has an additional
    audible signal which sounds for 6 seconds,
    or until the driver fastens his belt.
    The following applies to the both front
    seats: If the belt is not fastened before the
    car starts to move there will be an additional
    reminder when the speed exceeds 15 mph.
    The text Use your seatbelt. is lit on the
    Saab Information Display (SID) and the
    symbol will flash.
    If the belt is not fastened then an audible
    signal will come on after 30 seconds.
    The text in the SID can be turned off by the
    CLR-button on the steering wheel.

    Driver seat safety belt reminder



  • Page 13

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 13 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    Correct position for safety belt
    WARNING
    Proper positioning of the safety belt is
    extremely important.
    • An out of position safety belt can result
    in the wearer sliding underneath the
    belt in a crash (submarining) and
    injury can result from the lap portion
    cutting into the abdomen.

    Correct seating position

    • Never fasten the safety belt with the
    shoulder belt behind the body or pull
    the belt off the shoulder and under the
    arm.
    • Two people must never share one
    safety belt. In the event of a crash
    those sharing a belt risk being crushed
    together and injured.
    Consider this:
    • Position the lap strap snugly and low
    across the hips so that it just touches the
    thighs.
    The shoulder strap must be as far in on
    the shoulder as possible.
    • Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted
    or rubbing against any sharp edges.
    • There should not be any slack in the belt.
    Pull the belt tight – particularly important
    when thick outer clothing is worn. It
    is advisable to remove thick items of
    clothing.

    13

    • Refrain from tilting the backrest more than
    necessary, as the safety belt provides
    better protection when the seat is in the
    more upright position.
    • Only one person per safety belt!
    • For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
    the retractor will allow the wearer freedom
    of movement. The retractor locks up automatically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
    sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
    applied hard or a crash occurs.
    • Children up to 6 years of age must always
    be seated in a child seat. Saab recommends the use of a child seat for children
    up to the age of 10.
    • Children who have grown out of a child
    seat should be restrained by the car’s
    standard three-point belts. Make sure that
    the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
    neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cushion may be necessary.



  • Page 14

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 14 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    14

    Safety

    To fasten the belt

    Front safety belts
    Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and inserting the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
    securely fastened.
    Position the lap part low across the hips.
    Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
    and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
    tighten the lap belt part.
    The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible.

    Press the red button to release the belt
    Press the red button on the belt buckle to
    release the belt.
    The front safety belts have their lower
    anchorage points on the seats. The safety
    belts follow the seats when the legroom is
    adjusted.
    Refer to page 260 for how to check the function of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.

    The belt guide on door pillar, Sport Sedan
    and SportCombi

    Belt height adjustment,
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi
    The belt guide on the door pillar for the front
    safety belts can be set at different heights.
    The front belt guide in the Convertible is not
    adjustable due to the belt being incorporated into the seat.



  • Page 15

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 15 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as
    possible without rubbing against the neck.
    To avoid chafing in the case of a short
    person, the guide can be lowered until the
    belt comes about an inch (a few centimeters) from the throat but still provides safe
    restraint.
    Raise the belt guide by pushing it upward to
    the desired position. To lower it, depress the
    catch release button while lowering the
    guide. Check that the guide locks in its new
    position.

    Safety belt use during pregnancy
    Pregnant women must always wear a
    safety belt to protect both themselves and
    the unborn child.
    The lap belt should be placed low, across
    the hips and over the upper thighs.

    15



  • Page 16

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 16 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    16

    Safety

    Safety belt pretensioners
    WARNING
    If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
    belts, belt pretensioners and other
    components must be inspected and
    replaced as necessary. We recommend
    that you contact a Saab dealer.
    Never make any alterations or repairs to
    the safety belt yourself. We recommend
    that you contact a Saab dealer for any
    necessary repairs.

    Sport Sedan and SportCombi: The front
    safety belts are equipped with pretensioners and force limiters. The pretensioners
    are activated in the event of a violent frontal
    or side-on crash. The safety belt pretensioners are only activated if the safety belt in
    question is in use but not activated should
    the car roll over.
    The safety belt pretensioners serve to
    reduce the forward movement of the body
    by tensioning the belt. The force limiters
    reduce belt loads on the body by "slackening" the safety belt slightly to absorb the
    body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possible.

    Convertible: The front and rear safety belts
    are equipped with pretensioners and force
    limiters. The pretensioners are activated in
    the event of a violent frontal or side-on
    crash. The front safety belt pretensioners
    are only activated if the safety belt in question is in use.
    The safety belt pretensioners serve to
    reduce the movement of the body by tensioning the belt, including in a roll over
    crash. The force limiters reduce belt loads
    on the body by "slackening" the safety belt
    slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic energy
    as gradually as possible.



  • Page 17

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 17 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    Safety belts, rear seat, Sport
    Sedan and SportCombi
    Safety belts rear seat, Convertible, see
    page 75

    WARNING
    • Make sure that the belt does not
    become trapped when the backrest is
    folded down or raised (see page 136).
    • If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
    must be properly secured with the
    safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
    cargo being thrown about during hard
    braking or a crash, which could cause
    personal injury.

    The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible.

    • Check that the belt is not twisted or
    lying against sharp edges.

    Press the red button on the buckle to
    release the belt.

    • Make sure you use the correct safety
    belt buckle. The buckles for the center
    and left-hand rear seats are close
    together.

    See page 260 for the checking of belt function, cleaning, etc.

    The three rear seats all have three-point
    safety belts with inertia reels.
    Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across
    you and inserting the tongue into the buckle.
    Check that it is securely fastened.
    Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
    and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
    tighten the lap belt part.

    Rear safety belts, Sport Sedan and SportCombi

    Securing an item on the rear seat

    17



  • Page 18

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 18 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    18

    Safety

    Seats
    WARNING
    Never adjust the driver’s seat except
    when the car is stationary.

    Manually adjusted front seats 3
    The following front seat adjustments can be
    made to achieve a comfortable driving
    position:






    Height 3
    Legroom
    Backrest rake angle
    Lumbar support firmness 3
    Head restraint height

    We recommend that adjustments to the
    driver’s seat be performed in the following
    order:
    1 Height
    2 Legroom
    3 Backrest rake angle
    4 Head restraint height
    Lastly, adjust the position of the steering
    wheel (see page 118).
    Electrically adjustable front seats 3
    See page 20.
    Electric heating, front seats 3

    Height adjustment 3

    See pages 113.

    Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is
    spring-loaded to return to its neutral position. Repeated lifting of the lever will
    increase the height in steps.
    Press down the lever to lower the seat.
    Repeated downward presses of the lever
    will lower the seat in steps.



  • Page 19

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 19 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety

    Adjusting the legroom

    Legroom adjustment
    Lift the lever under the front of the seat and
    slide the seat to the desired position.

    WARNING
    Check that the seat is locked in the new
    position. If not, it may move while the car
    is being driven and it could result in injury
    to the occupant in the event of a crash.

    Adjusting the backrest

    Backrest rake angle
    WARNING
    The backrest should be upright during
    driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
    backrest can provide optimum protection
    in the event of emergency braking or a
    crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
    To find the most comfortable position, turn
    the knob to provide stepless adjustment of
    the backrest.

    19

    Adjusting the lumbar support

    Lumbar support 3
    Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by
    turning the knob.



  • Page 20

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 20 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    20

    Safety

    Electrically adjustable front
    seats 3
    WARNING
    • The seats are actuated by powerful
    motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting the seat, and make sure that nothing gets caught and damaged. Ensure
    that nothing can be trapped behind the
    seat when adjusting it.
    • Bear in mind that children can be
    injured if they play with the electricallyoperated seats.
    • Always remove the remote control
    when you leave the car to prevent
    personal injury caused by the electrically adjustable seats, for example,
    due to children playing. Electrically
    adjustable front seats with memory
    function, see page 21.
    With the doors closed the seats can only be
    adjusted when the ignition is ON.
    However, there are two exceptions:
    • To facilitate getting into the car, both
    seats can be adjusted when either of the
    front doors is open.
    • The seats can be adjusted up to
    2 minutes after both doors have been
    closed (applicable only to cars without
    window and sunroof pinch protection).

    Adjusting the height and angle

    Height adjustment and seat
    angle
    Adjust the height of the seat with the rear
    section of the front lever.
    Adjust the angle of the seat with the front
    section of the front lever.

    Adjusting the legroom

    Legroom adjustment
    Adjust the legroom with the front lever.



  • Page 21

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 21 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety

    Adjusting the rake angle

    Backrest rake angle
    WARNING
    The backrest should be upright during
    driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
    backrest can provide optimum protection
    in the event of emergency braking or a
    crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
    Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with
    the rear lever.

    Adjusting the lumbar support
    Driver’s seat in Sport Sedan and SportCombi

    Lumbar support 3
    Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by
    turning the knob.

    21

    Memory function buttons

    Memory function 3
    WARNING
    The legroom of the electrically operated
    driver’s seat can always be adjusted,
    whether or not a front door is open and
    irrespective of the position of the ignition
    switch.



  • Page 22

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 22 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    22

    Safety

    When the ignition is ON, all seat settings
    can be adjusted. When the door is open and
    before the remote control has been inserted
    into the ignition switch, all seat settings can
    be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.
    The memory also includes the door mirror
    settings.
    Storing and restoring settings
    1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
    The lumbar support is not included by
    the memory function.
    2 Press and hold the M-button and then
    press one of the preselect buttons (1, 2
    or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that
    the settings have been saved.
    To recall programmed settings, press and
    hold the desired memory button until the
    seat and door mirrors adopt their programmed positions. The memory function
    also includes the door mirror settings.
    To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side
    door mirror can be angled down, refer to
    page 122.



  • Page 23

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 23 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety

    Head restraints
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi
    Head restraint, Convertible, see page 74.

    WARNING
    • Adjust the head restraint so that the
    head is optimally supported and the
    center of the head restraint is at ear
    height, thus reducing the likelihood of
    neck injury in a crash.
    • Raise the head restraints in the seats
    that are occupied.
    The front seats are equipped with Saab
    Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These are
    designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
    the car is hit from behind.
    The SAHR is a mechanical system, actuated by body weight. The mechanism is built
    into the top of the backrest, where it is connected to the head restraint.

    In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
    forced back against the backrest. This, in
    turn, causes the mechanism to press the
    head restraint forward and upward, thus
    limiting the backward movement of the
    head.
    Therefore, the SAHR does not normally
    need to be replaced or repaired after a rearend crash.
    The front and rear head restraints can be
    raised and lowered to a number of positions.
    The front seat head restraints must be
    set at a height where at least one notch
    is visible on the rear of the head restraint
    stem (pole).
    In this position the vertical distance between
    the top of the seat back and the head
    restraint should be greater than 30 mm
    when measured at the rear.
    Under no circumstances should the front
    seat head restraint be forced down below
    this position.
    • Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
    sides and pull it straight up.
    • Lowering: Press the head restraint
    forward and downward.
    The rear head restraints can be fully lowered to improve rearward vision when the
    rear seats are unoccupied.

    23



  • Page 24

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 24 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    24

    Safety

    Child safety
    WARNING
    WARNING
    • Children must always be suitably
    restrained in the car.
    • DEATH or SERIOUS
    INJURY can occur
    • Children 12 and under or
    shorter than 150 cm
    (59 inches) can be killed by
    the airbag
    • The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
    for children
    • NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
    the front
    • Sit as far back as possible from the
    airbag
    • ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
    CHILD RESTRAINTS

    • Never leave children unattended in a
    car, even for a short time.
    – Children can suffer heat stroke,
    perhaps die, in a matter of minutes.
    – Children can put the car into gear and
    hurt themselves or others.
    • At gas stations, take the remote
    control out of the car while filling the
    tank.
    • Never allow children to climb on top of
    or under motor vehicles.
    • Always look for children before backing your car out of a garage or driveway.
    • To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
    never let a car idle in an enclosed
    garage.
    • Supervise young children around
    buckets of water while washing your
    car. Small children can drown in a
    short time in less than an inch of water.

    WARNING
    Protect children from getting
    trapped in the trunk of your car
    • Teach children not to play in or around
    cars.
    • Watch children when loading or
    unloading the car so they don´t get
    locked in by mistake.
    • Always lock the doors and trunk of
    your car, and keep the keys out of children´s sight and reach.
    • Keep the rear fold-down seat closed to
    help prevent children from getting into
    the trunk from inside the car.



  • Page 25

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 25 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    General information on child
    safety
    The same attention must be given to child
    safety in the car as is given to adults.
    Children travel most safely when properly
    restrained. However, the type of restraint
    must be appropriate for the size of the child.
    We recommend that you always consult
    your Saab dealer before fitting a child seat,
    child restraint or booster cushion.
    Make sure you are acquainted with the
    legal requirements for seating children
    in the car.
    When fitting child restraints in cars you
    must always read the instructions supplied by the child restraint manufacturer.
    Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
    restraint in accordance with the manufacturer’s child restraint instructions.
    Saab recommends the use of a rearfacing child seat for as long as this is
    possible - for all children under 18 kg
    (40 lbs.) as a minimum. Use a child seat
    approved for the weight of the child.
    Saab recommends the use of a booster seat
    for children up to the length of 150 cm
    (4 ft 11 in.) or the weight of 36 kg (80 lbs.).

    LATCH
    LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
    for CHildren) is a US/Canadian safety standard for a uniform method of fitting child
    restraints without using the standard safety
    belts. Only certain child restraints are
    equipped to utilize the LATCH system.
    The LATCH system is installed in the car to
    facilitate proper fitting of child restraints
    designed for and equipped with LATCH
    attachments.

    25

    The LATCH system consists of top tether
    and lower anchorages . In this vehicle,
    LATCH is installed at the two outboard seating positions in the rear seat, and there is a
    top tether on the rear center position (not
    Convertible).
    The top tethers are located on top of the
    parcel shelf (Sport Sedan), see page 28, on
    the back of the rear seat (SportCombi), see
    page 29 and behind the head restraints
    (Convertible) see page 30.
    The lower anchorages are located where
    the seat cushion and seat back come
    together. There is a label above the anchorages, see picture on next page. Label
    consists of a symbol of a child restrained in
    a seat inside a circle.
    When fitting child restraints in cars you must
    always read the instructions supplied by the
    child restraint manufacturer.
    If you have any questions regarding LATCH
    please contact your Saab dealer.



  • Page 26

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 26 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    26

    Safety

    Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Sport Sedan and SportCombi

    Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Convertible

    Lower anchor and top tether anchor locations, Sport Sedan and SportCombi.
    Convertible has two top tether anchors,
    one behind each head restraint
    (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two
    lower anchors.
    (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with
    top tether anchors.
    The right side and left side rear passenger
    seating positions have exposed metal
    anchors located in the crease between the
    seatback and the seat cushion.



  • Page 27

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 27 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety

    27

    LATCH child seat installation
    Before starting the installation, please read
    through this instruction, and the child seat
    installation instruction.
    1 Place the child restraint on one of the
    designated outboard rear seat cushions.
    2 Slide the attachment on the child
    restraint in between the seat cushion
    and backrest.
    3 Press the child restraint down on the
    seat, 1 in illustration.
    4 Press the child restraint rearward, lining
    up the inner restraint attachment arm
    with the label, 2 in illustration.
    5 Connect the restraint attachment arms
    to the anchorages 3 in illustration.
    6 Follow the child restraint instructions to
    confirm that both restraint attachment
    arms are properly attached to the bars.
    7 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
    anchorage and tighten according to the
    restraint instructions, see page 28
    and 30.
    8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
    check that the restraint is securely
    attached at both the lower anchorage
    bars and the top tether strap.
    For the top tether, only use the strap supplied with the child restraint.
    When fitting child restraints in cars you
    must always read the instructions supplied by the child restraint manufacturer.

    Rigid 2-point lower anchorage with top
    tether

    Use the integrated harness to restraint the
    child, according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions.
    The availability of LATCH child restraints is
    limited.

    Semi-rigid 2-point lower anchorage with
    top tether



  • Page 28

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 28 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    28

    Safety

    Child top tether anchorages for
    forward facing child seats
    Sport Sedan

    WARNING
    Child top tether anchorages are designed
    to withstand only those loads imposed by
    correctly fitted child restraints.
    Under no circumstances are they to be
    used for adult safety belts.
    Child restraints with a tether strap must be
    attached according to Canadian and U.S.
    safety standards.
    If you have any questions regarding child
    anchorages please contact your Saab
    dealer.
    The car is provided with three top tether
    anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
    the seating position in which the child
    restraint is to be installed and attach the
    restraint as follows:
    1 Open the cover that is right behind the
    child restraint, 1 in illustration.
    2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
    3 Secure the lower part of the child
    restraint by means of the lower anchor-

    Child top tether anchorages in parcel shelf, Sport Sedan

    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    ages or the safety belts as described in
    the child restraint installation instruction.
    Lower the headrest and route the tether
    over it.
    Attach the tether to the anchorage, 2 in
    illustration.
    Close the cover to the middle position, 3
    in illustration.
    Tighten the tether so that the back of the
    child restraint is pressed hard against
    the backrest.
    Pull the child restraint to make a second
    check that the restraint is securely
    attached at both the lower anchorages
    bars on the safety belts and the top
    tether strap.



  • Page 29

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 29 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    Child top tether anchorages for
    forward facing child seats

    7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
    child restraint is pressed hard against
    the backrest.
    8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
    check that the restraint is securely
    attached at both the lower anchorages
    bars on the safety belts and the top
    tether strap.

    SportCombi

    WARNING
    Child top tether anchorages are designed
    to withstand only those loads imposed by
    correctly fitted child restraints.
    Under no circumstances are they to be
    used for adult safety belts.
    If a cargo net is fitted, do not pull the top
    tether strap through the cargo net in such
    a way that there is slack in the strap to the
    child seat.
    Child restraints with a tether strap must be
    attached according to Canadian and U.S.
    safety standards.
    If you have any questions regarding child
    anchorages please contact your Saab
    dealer.
    The top tether anchors are located on the
    back of the rear seat frame above the floor
    for each rear seating position.

    29

    Child top tether anchorages, SportCombi

    The car is provided with three top tether
    anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
    the seating position in which the child
    restraint is to be installed and attach the
    restraint as follows:
    1 If the anchor for the desired seating
    position is not in the upright position then
    fold down the rear seatback(s) to access
    the anchor(s).
    2 Fold the backrest back upright.
    3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
    4 Secure the lower part of the child
    restraint by means of the lower anchorages or the safety belts as described in
    the child restraint installation instruction.
    5 Lower the headrest and route the tether
    over it.
    6 Attach the tether to the anchorage.



  • Page 30

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 30 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    30

    Safety

    Child top tether anchorages for
    forward facing child seats
    Convertible

    WARNING
    Child top tether anchorages are designed
    to withstand only those loads imposed by
    correctly fitted child restraints.
    Under no circumstances are they to be
    used for adult safety belts.

    How to take away the head restraint

    Top tether anchorages in the rear seat

    1 Raise the head restraint
    2 Push the catch forward and pull the head
    restraint straight upward

    Child restraints with a tether strap must be
    attached according to Canadian and U.S.
    safety standards.
    If you have any questions regarding child
    anchorages please contact your Saab
    dealer.
    The car is provided with two top tether
    anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
    the seating position in which the child
    restraint is to be installed and attach the
    restraint as follows:
    1 Remove the head restraint on the seating position where the child restraint
    shall be fitted.
    2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
    3 Secure the lower part of the child
    restraint by means of the lower anchor-

    4
    5
    6

    7

    ages or the safety belts as described in
    the child restraint installation instruction.
    Attach the tether to the anchorage.
    Tighten the tether so that the back of the
    child restraint is pressed hard against
    the backrest.
    Pull the child restraint to make a second
    check that the restraint is securely
    attached at both the lower anchorages
    bars on the safety belts and the top
    tether strap.
    Put the head restraint back on and make
    sure it is securely mounted. Adjust it in
    its highest position.

    WARNING
    If the size of the child restraint makes it
    impossible to put the head restraint back
    on, place it in the trunk.



  • Page 31

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 31 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    Installation of child restraint
    using the standard safety belt
    WARNING
    Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
    instructions on the use of child restraint
    systems can cause your child to strike the
    vehicle´s interior during a sudden stop or
    crash.
    Child restraints that are approved for rearward facing installation in the rear seat can
    be positioned in any of the three rear places.
    Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
    When fitting child restraints in cars you
    must always read the instructions supplied by the child restraint manufacturer.

    If fitting a child restraint that is intended to be
    secured in position by the standard safety
    belt, make use of the locking function of the
    belt.
    Locking the belt lessens the risk that the
    seat will work loose while the car is in
    motion.
    1 Position the child restraint in the back
    seat.
    2 Route the belt in the restraint according
    to the installation instruction of the
    restraint.
    3 Pull out the belt completely until it stops.
    Then let the belt slowly pull in the slack.
    Clicking sound indicates that the lock
    function is in work.
    4 Pull the shoulder belt tight to secure the
    child restraint in position.
    5 Check for correct locking function by
    pulling on the belt. The belt must not
    unreel.

    31

    The safety belt locking function will be deactivated when the safety belt is retracted.
    1 Disengage the safety belt latch from the
    buckle.
    2 Disengage the safety belt from the child
    restraint, according to the instructions
    from the child restraint manufacturer.
    3 Let the safety belt retract until the clicking sound ceases.



  • Page 32

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 32 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    32

    Safety

    Airbag

    Airbag system components

    WARNING
    To reduce risk of death or serious injury:
    • Always wear your safety belt.
    • Always adjust your seat so that you
    are as far back as possible but still
    able to operate the pedals and reach
    the steering wheel and controls
    comfortably.
    • Passengers 12 and under or shorter
    than 59 inches (150 cm) must always
    travel in the rear seat as the car is fitted
    with a passenger airbag.
    • Never fit a child seat in front of the
    passenger airbag.

    • Airbag in steering wheel
    • Airbag in instrument panel in front of
    passenger seat
    • Side airbags in front seat backrests
    Convertible: The side airbags help
    protect the head also
    • Inflatable curtains along length of headlining (from front to rear roof pillars)
    (Sport Sedan and SportCombi only)
    • Safety belt pretensioners for front seats
    Convertible: and outer rear seats.
    The airbag system supplements the protection provided by the safety belts to further
    enhance the safety of occupants taller than
    59 in. (150 cm).
    When the system is activated at the moment
    of impact, the airbag inflates and then
    deflates through holes in the back. The
    whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,
    quicker than the blink of an eye.
    The steering wheel and passenger airbags
    are so-called smart airbags. The driver and
    passenger airbag system compensates for
    safety belt usage and the force of the crash
    at the moment of impact.

    There are two impact sensors on the front
    bumper, under the lacquered shell. Very
    soon after the moment of impact, these
    register that the car is involved in a crash.
    Using this information and data from the
    central sensor in the control module, the
    control module determines whether or not to
    inflate the airbags. The control module also
    controls whether other components of the
    airbag system are to be deployed: safety
    belt pretensioners, inflatable curtains (Sport
    Sedan and SportCombi) and roll over bars
    (Convertible).
    Which airbag system components are
    deployed depends on a number of factors,
    such as the force of the crash and the angle
    of impact.
    If the airbag system registers forces equivalent to a high-speed crash (airbags inflated
    to Stage II), the inflatable curtains will also
    be activated (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
    see page 42.
    If a fault arises in the airbag system during
    a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the
    main instrument panel will come on and the
    Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
    Airbag malfunction.
    Contact service.



  • Page 33

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 33 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety

    Inflated airbag (driver’s side).
    Inflation and deflation of airbag takes
    approx. 0.1 s
    The driver and passenger front airbags are
    triggered by violent front-end crashes. They
    are not activated by minor front-end
    impacts, if the car overturns or by rear- and
    side-impacts.
    The car is equipped as standard with
    a passenger airbag.

    Both front airbags inflated

    Note:
    Impact sensors react differently depending
    on whether or not the front safety belts on
    the driver’s and passenger sides are used.
    Situations can therefore arise where only
    one of the airbags inflates. It is also possible
    for only the safety belt pretensioners to be
    activated and for the airbags to remain uninflated.
    If only Stage I is activated at the moment of
    impact, Stage II will automatically be activated later to neutralize the gas generator in
    the airbag.

    33



  • Page 34

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 34 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    34

    Safety

    Airbag system
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    Steering wheel with integral airbag
    Passenger airbag
    Side airbag
    Inflatable curtain (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
    Sensors in front bumper
    Sensor, side-impact protection
    Sensor, side-impact protection (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
    Electronic control module and central sensor (SDM)

    Accessories and other equipment must
    not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
    these are where the airbags inflate in the
    event of a crash.



  • Page 35

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 35 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    WARNING
    • Even if the car is equipped with
    AIRBAGS, safety belts must still
    always be worn by all occupants.
    • Note that because an airbag inflates
    and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
    not provide protection against a
    second impact occurring in the same
    incident. Always use your safety belt.
    • Always sit with the whole of your back
    in contact with the backrest of the seat,
    and with your seat as far back as is
    practical.Otherwise you will be thrown
    back against the backrest when the
    airbag inflates which could cause you
    injury or death. The airbag needs
    room in which to inflate.

    • Never attach anything to the steering
    wheel or passenger side of the instrument panel, as this could result in
    injury if the airbag should inflate. The
    same applies to anything you might
    have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for
    instance.
    • Some components of the airbag will
    be warm for a short time. In some
    circumstances the airbag can cause
    minor burns or abrasions to the body
    when the airbag inflates/deflates.
    • Never rest your hands or forearms on
    the steering-wheel center padding.

    35

    • If the airbag warning light
    remains
    on after the car has been started or
    comes on while you are driving, have
    the car checked immediately. We
    recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer. The warning light could signify
    that the airbags may not inflate in a
    crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. See page 85.
    • Fumes are generated by the chemical
    reaction that inflates the airbag.
    Skin surfaces that show signs of irritation should be washed with clean
    water and a mild soap as soon as
    possible.
    In the event of eye irritation, flush the
    eyes thoroughly with clean water for at
    least 20 minutes.
    In case of persistent irritation, consult
    a doctor.



  • Page 36

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 36 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    36

    Safety

    Operation of the steering wheel airbag in
    a front-end crash

    Front passenger seat
    WARNING

    Moment of impact.

    WARNING
    Sensors detect a
    deceleration and send
    a signal via the control
    module to a gas generator that inflates the
    airbag.

    The inflating airbag
    cushions the driver.

    Airbag now fully
    inflated.

    The airbag starts to
    deflate.

    Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
    the right front seat of a car equipped with
    a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag
    in the event of a crash could seriously
    injure or kill a child.
    The system is the same as that used on the
    driver’s side.
    The airbag systems are interconnected and
    have a common warning light
    . The passenger airbag module is housed in the
    fascia above the glove box and is marked
    "AIRBAG".
    Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
    moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
    crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccupied.
    The car is equipped as standard with
    a passenger airbag.

    • DEATH or SERIOUS
    INJURY can occur
    • Children 12 and under or
    shorter than 59 inches
    (150 cm) can be killed by the
    airbag
    • The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
    for children
    • NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
    the front
    • Sit as far back as possible from the
    airbag
    • ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
    CHILD RESTRAINTS
    • Never allow a child to stand in front of
    the seat or to sit on the lap of a front
    seat passenger. Serious injury or
    death could result if the airbag is
    inflated in a crash.
    • The glove box must be closed while
    travelling. An open glove box door
    could cause leg injuries in the event of
    a crash.



  • Page 37

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 37 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    • Never place anything on the dash or in
    front of the seat as, in addition to being
    a hazard to passengers, this could
    interfere with the function of the airbag
    in the event of a crash. The same
    applies to the mounting of accessories
    on the dash.
    • Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
    up on the dash, on the seat or out of
    the window.
    • Do not carry anything in your lap.

    Passenger Sensing System
    Vehicles with a passenger sensing system
    have indicator LEDs on the facia. The indicators will be lit during the system check
    when you turn the ignition switch to ST or
    ON. When the system check is complete,
    either the ON or the OFF LED, will be lit. See
    Airbag warning light on page 85. If your
    vehicle does not have the indicators pictured, then your vehicle does not have the
    passenger sensing system.
    The passenger sensing system will turn off
    the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
    and side airbag under certain conditions.
    The driver’s airbags is not part of the passenger sensing system.
    The passenger sensing system works with
    sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors
    are designed to detect the presence of a
    properly-seated occupant and determine if
    the passenger’s frontal airbag should be
    enabled (may inflate) or not.
    Accident statistics show that children are
    safer if they are restrained in the rear rather
    than the front seat.

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator,
    U.S.

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator,
    Canada

    37



  • Page 38

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 38 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    38

    Safety

    Saab recommends that child restraints be
    secured in a rear seat, including an infant
    riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child
    riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
    older child riding in a booster seat.
    Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint. A label
    on your sun visor says, “Never put a rearfacing child seat in the front.” This is
    because the risk to the rear-facing child is so
    great, if the airbag deploys.

    WARNING
    A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
    be seriously injured or killed if the right
    front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
    because the back of the rear-facing child
    restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag.
    Even though the passenger sensing
    system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a
    rear-facing child restraint, no system is
    fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that
    an airbag will not deploy under some
    unusual circumstance, even though it is
    turned off. Saab recommends that rearfacing child restraints be secured in the
    rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

    The passenger sensing system is designed
    to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
    airbag if:
    • the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
    • the system determines that an infant is
    present in a rear-facing infant seat
    • the system determines that a small child
    is present in a forward-facing child
    restraint
    • the system determines that a small child
    is present in a booster seat
    • a right front passenger takes his/her
    weight off of the seat for a period of time
    • the right front passenger seat is occupied
    by a smaller person, such as a child who
    has outgrown child restraints
    • or if there is a critical problem with the
    airbag system or the passenger sensing
    system.

    When the passenger sensing system has
    turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag,
    the off indicator will light and stay lit to
    remind you that the airbag is off.
    Saab recommends that child restraints be
    secured in a rear seat,but if a child restraint
    has been installed and the on indicator is lit,
    turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
    restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
    child restraint following the child restraint
    manufacturer’s directions and refer to
    Installation of child restraint using the standard safety belt on page 31.
    If after reinstalling the child restraint and
    restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still
    lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s
    seatback is not pressing the child restraint
    into the seat cushion. If this happens,
    slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and
    adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also
    make sure the child restraint is not trapped
    under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
    If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child
    in the child restraint in a rear seat position in
    the vehicle and check with your dealer.



  • Page 39

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 39 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    The passenger sensing system is designed
    to enable (may inflate) the right front
    passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the
    system senses that a person of adult size is
    sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
    seat. When the passenger sensing system
    has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on
    indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
    that the airbag is active.
    For some children who have outgrown child
    restraints and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn
    off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
    depending upon the person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
    should wear a safety belt properly —
    whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

    If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right
    front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator
    is lit, it could be because that person is not
    sitting properly in the seat. If this happens,
    turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
    place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
    the seat cushion, with the person’s legs
    comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
    and have the person remain in this position
    for about two minutes. This will allow the
    system to detect that person and then
    enable the passenger’s airbag.

    WARNING
    If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and
    stays on, it means that something may be
    wrong with the airbag system. If this ever
    happens, havethe vehicle serviced
    promptly, because an adult-size person
    sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
    may not have the protection of the frontal
    airbag. See Airbag warning lamp on
    page 43 for more on this, including important safety information.

    39

    Aftermarket equipment, such as seat
    covers, can affect how well the passenger
    sensing system operates. You may want to
    consider not using seat covers or other
    aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
    the passenger sensing system. See Adding
    Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle for more information about modifications
    that can affect how the system operates.

    WARNING
    Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
    seat or between the passenger’s seat
    cushion and seatback may interfere with
    the proper operation of the passenger
    sensing system.



  • Page 40

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 40 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    40

    Safety

    Head protection
    The pillar trim and headlining (not Convertible soft top) are designed to absorb energy,
    softening possible blows to the head. After
    a crash, these items must be changed in the
    seat positions that were occupied. Never fit
    accessories to the pillar trim or headlining
    as these could reduce the effectiveness of
    the head protection and inflatable curtain
    (Sport Sedan and SportCombi).

    Side-impact protection

    WARNING
    • This car is equipped with side airbags
    and no extra seat cover should be
    fitted. Failure to observe this warning
    could result in the side airbags not
    inflating as intended and thus not
    providing the intended protection
    either.
    • Never place any object in the area that
    would be occupied by the inflated airbag.
    • For optimum protection, sit upright in
    the seat, with your safety belt correctly
    fastened.

    • The side-impact protection will only be
    activated in the event of a side-on
    crash and not in the event of a rearend crash or the car rolling over. For
    the Convertible’s Roll-over protection
    see page 76.
    • Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
    the seat seam, in the area of the side
    airbag must be repaired immediately.
    We recommend that you contact a
    Saab dealer.
    The side airbags, which help protect the
    upper body (head also in Convertible), are
    integrated in the outside edges of the front
    seat backrests. The side impact protection
    of the Sport Sedan and SportCombi also
    includes inflatable curtains (see page 42).
    The side impact protection will be activated
    if certain predetermined conditions are met
    such as the force and angle of the impact,
    the speed of the car on impact, and at which
    point on the car´s side the impact occurs.



  • Page 41

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 41 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety

    41

    The side-impact protection is only activated
    on the side of impact, while the safety belt
    pretensioners on both sides are deployed.
    The front seats and outer rear seats have
    safety belt pretensioners.
    There are two sensors on each side of the
    car, one at the rear of each door sill and one
    in the lower part of each C-pillar.
    Convertible: The Convertible has two side
    impact protection sensors, one on each side
    of the car. These are located at the rear of
    the sills.

    Inflated side airbag and inflatable curtain,
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi

    Inflated side airbag with head protection,
    Convertible



  • Page 42

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 42 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    42

    Safety

    Inflatable curtains, Sport Sedan
    and SportCombi
    WARNING
    • Do not sit with your head resting
    against the side window. The inflatable curtain is designed to inflate
    between the window and the head.
    Resting the head against the window
    could prevent the inflatable curtain
    from providing the intended
    protection.
    • Hang only light clothes from the hooks
    on the rear seat courtesy handles. The
    items of clothing must not contain
    heavy or sharp objects. Do not use
    wire coat hangers.

    • Do not position a sun visor or similar
    item in the area that would be filled by
    the inflatable curtain.
    • To reduce the risk of head injuries in
    the event of a crash, the roof pillars
    and headlining incorporate cushioning
    material. Do not attach anything to the
    car’s headlining, roof pillars or side
    panels as this could prevent the sideimpact protection from providing the
    intended protection.
    • Do not stack loads so high that they
    could encumber the inflatable curtain
    in the event of a crash.
    The inflatable curtains, which protect the
    head, are concealed along the lengths of
    the headlining (all the way from front to rear
    roof pillars).
    The inflatable curtains inflate at the same
    time as the side airbags in the front seats in
    case of a side-on impact.
    The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of
    head injuries to the occupants of the car’s
    outer seats. The inflatable curtains deploys
    into the window area between the front and
    rear roof pillars.
    If the airbag system registers forces equivalent to a high-speed frontal crash (Stage II
    for the steering wheel and passenger
    airbags), the inflatable curtains will also be
    deployed.

    Inflated inflatable curtain, Sport Sedan



  • Page 43

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 43 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    Airbag warning lamp
    WARNING
    • If the airbag readiness light stays on
    after you start your vehicle, it means
    the airbag system may not be working
    properly. See page 85.
    • The airbags in your vehicle may not
    inflate in a crash, or they could even
    inflate without a crash.

    Prohibited seating position

    For optimal protection, do not sit too close to
    the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if
    someone is sleeping in the car. The inflatable curtain comes down from the headlining and covers a large portion of the side
    windows.

    • To help avoid injury to yourself or
    others, have your vehicle serviced
    right away if the airbag readiness light
    stays on after you start your vehicle.

    43

    What Will You See After an
    Airbag Inflates?
    After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
    so quickly that some people may not even
    realize the airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag module - the steering
    wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the
    instrument panel for the right front passenger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your
    vehicle near the side windows - will be hot
    for a short time. The parts of the bag that
    come into contact with you may be warm,
    but not too hot to touch. There will be some
    smoke and dust coming from the vents in
    the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
    not prevent the driver from seeing or being
    able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
    people from leaving the vehicle.



  • Page 44

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 44 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    44

    Safety
    WARNING

    When an airbag inflates, there is dust in
    the air. This dust could cause breathing
    problems for people with a history of
    asthma or other breathing trouble. To
    avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should
    get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
    have breathing problems but can not get
    out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
    then get fresh air by opening a window or
    a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you
    should seek medical attention.
    In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
    airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
    deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
    • Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
    After an airbag inflates, you will need
    some new parts for your airbag system. If
    you do not get them, the airbag system
    will not be there to help protect you in
    another crash. A new system will include
    airbag modules and possibly other parts.
    The service manual for your vehicle
    covers the need to replace other parts.

    • Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
    sensing and diagnostic module which
    records information after a crash. See
    Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
    Recorders on page 278.
    • Let only qualified technicians work on
    your airbag system. Improper service can
    mean that your airbag system will not
    work properly. See your dealer for
    service.

    Notice: If you damage the covering for
    the driver's or the right front passenger's
    airbag, or the side impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side windows,
    the bag may not work properly. You may
    have to replace the airbag module in the
    steering wheel, both the airbag module
    and the instrument panel for the right
    front passenger's airbag, or side impact
    airbag module and ceiling covering for
    the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do
    not open or break the airbag coverings.

    Servicing the airbag system
    The airbag system must be inspected as
    part of the normal service program but otherwise may be regarded as maintenancefree.

    Scrapping or working on airbag
    and belt pretensioners
    WARNING
    • Under no circumstances should any
    modifications be made that affect the
    steering wheel or the airbag’s electrical circuitry.
    • During any welding, both battery
    cables must be disconnected and
    covered.
    • Before quick drying paint in the vicinity
    of the electronic control module, the
    module’s grounding points and wiring
    must be covered.
    • Airbags and safety belt pretensioners
    must be deployed under controlled
    conditions before the car is scrapped
    or any of the system’s components are
    removed. Airbags or belt pretensioners that have been deployed as a
    result of a crash must be replaced by
    new ones.



  • Page 45

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 45 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Safety
    • The car's impact protection consists of
    several different safety features
    including the airbags, seatbelts, steering wheel, seats and dashboard.
    These parts are co-ordinated with
    each other to provide optimum protection in the event of a collision, so never
    install an airbag from one car into
    another.
    There is no guarantee that it would
    then work satisfactorily in the event of
    a collision..
    • All work involving the scrapping or
    replacement of airbags or belt pretensioners must be carried out by authorized personnel only.

    45

    Frequently asked questions on
    function of the airbag

    How do I position the seat to leave room for
    the airbag to inflate?

    Do you still need to wear a safety belt if airbags are fitted?

    Don’t have your seat too far forward.

    Yes, always! The airbag system components merely supplement the car’s normal
    safety system. Moreover, the front airbags
    will only be actuated in a moderate to severe
    frontal, or near-frontal crash, which means,
    of course, that they provide no protection in
    minor frontal crashes, major rear- or sidecrashes or if the car rolls over.
    The safety belts help to reduce the sideway
    movement of the body in a crash.
    But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
    in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
    will make the optimum contact with the
    occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the
    occupant meets the airbag in an offset position, the protection afforded will be reduced.
    In addition, airbags provide no protection
    against a secondary impact occurring in the
    same incident. So there is no doubt about
    the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
    times.
    Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
    room to inflate.
    The airbag inflates very quickly and powerfully in order to protect an adult, before they
    are thrown forward, in a serious frontal
    crash.

    Recline the seat back to increase the distance between you and the airbag. For short
    drivers, special accessory pedal extensions
    are available through your Saab dealer.
    Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
    great force – to be fast enough to protect an
    adult in the seat.

    When do the airbags in the steering wheel
    and passenger side of the dash board
    inflate?
    The airbag will only be inflated under certain
    predetermined conditions in a moderate to
    severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
    depending on such factors as the force and
    angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
    impact, and the resistance to deformation of
    the impacting object.
    The airbag can only be activated once in the
    same incident.
    Do not attempt to drive the car after an
    airbag has been inflated, even if it is possible.

    What won’t trigger the airbag?
    The airbag will not be activated in all frontal
    crashes. For instance, if the car has hit
    something relatively soft and yielding (e.g. a
    snow drift or a hedge) or a solid object at a



  • Page 46

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 46 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    46

    Safety

    low impact speed, the airbag will not necessarily be triggered.

    How loud is the inflation?
    The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
    but it is of an very short duration and will not
    damage your hearing. For a short time afterwards you could experience a buzzing
    noise in your ears.
    Most people who have experienced it
    cannot remember the noise of the inflation
    at all – all they remember is the noise of the
    crash.

    Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
    passenger airbag is installed?
    Definitely not!
    Children 12 and under or shorter than
    55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the airbag.
    The back seat is the safest place for children.
    Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
    front.
    Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
    Always use seat belts and child restraints.

    What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
    light comes on?

    Adding Equipment to Your
    Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

    If the warning light is on, it means that a fault
    has been detected in the system. The
    airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
    intended and it might even be activated
    erroneously. You should therefore take the
    car to a workshop. We recommend that you
    contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.

    Is there anything I might add to the front or
    sides of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly?

    Are the dust and fumes given off when the
    airbag operates at all harmful?
    Most people who have remained in a car
    with little or no ventilation for several minutes complained only of minor irritation of
    the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as possible getting dust on your skin as there is a
    risk of skin irritation.
    If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
    bring on an attack, in which case you should
    follow the normal procedure advised by
    your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
    doctor afterwards.

    Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front end or
    side sheet metal or height, they may keep
    the airbag system from working properly.
    Also, the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If you have any questions about this,
    you should contact Saab Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. The
    phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance can be found on page
    276.

    Because I have a disability, I have to get my
    vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
    this will affect my advanced airbag system?
    Changing or moving any parts of the front
    seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
    diagnostic module or the inside rearview
    mirror can affect the operation of the
    advanced airbag system. If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
    numbers and addresses for Customer
    Assistance can be found on page 276.



  • Page 47

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 47 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Security

    47

    Security
    Doors ________________
    Central locking ________
    Car alarm _____________

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    48
    48
    56



  • Page 48

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 48 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    48

    Security

    Doors

    Central locking

    Open the door by lifting the door handle.
    The following message appears on the
    Saab Information Display (SID) if a door is
    not closed (text displayed first when vehicle
    speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the
    door has still not been closed):

    WARNING
    Leaving children or pets unattended in a
    locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
    ignition key. A child or others could be
    badly injured or even killed.

    Close doors.

    Remote control
    The remote control and ignition key are integrated in one unit, and referred to in this
    manual as the remote control.
    The remote control contains a mechanical
    key, referred to in this manual as the traditional key. This traditional key can be used
    in an emergency to lock or unlock the
    driver’s door from outside (see page 50).
    This key does not fit the ignition switch.

    A key code number is supplied with your
    car. This number needs to be quoted for
    ordering a new traditional key (contained in
    the remote control). Therefore, keep this
    number in a safe place.
    The remote control contains an electronic
    code that is unique to your car. When the
    remote control is inserted into the ignition
    switch, this code is checked. If the code is
    incorrect, the car will not start.
    The car is supplied with two remote controls. It is possible to have up to five remote
    controls programmed for the car at any one
    time. If one is lost, a replacement should be
    obtained as soon as possible. We recommend that you contact a Saab dealer. When
    a new key is programmed into the car, the
    lost key will be deprogrammed automatically.
    Note:
    If a new remote control has to be ordered
    and programmed, at least one old one is
    required for the locking system’s electronic
    unit to recognize the new (ordered) remote
    control.
    Once the new remote control has been programmed, the old unit that is lost will not
    work. Therefore you should carry two
    remote controls separately, especially on
    long journeys.



  • Page 49

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 49 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Security

    49

    Remote control functions

    NOTICE
    The remote control contains delicate
    electronics.
    • Do not expose it to water.
    • Avoid rough handling.

    Remote control
    1
    2
    3
    4

    Locks car
    Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting
    Unlocks and opens trunk lid.
    Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.
    Activates panic function

    • Do not place the remote control where
    it may be subjected to high temperatures, e.g. on the instrument panel.
    • Warm the remote control in your
    hands for a couple of minutes if it has
    become very cold to prevent malfunction.
    • For details on changing the battery,
    refer to page 54.

    Button Pressed once

    Pressed
    twice

    Hold and
    press the
    button more
    than 2 s

    Locks all doors.
    Unlocks driver´s Sport Sedan: Comfort
    opening, see
    door.
    The other
    page 119.
    doors are
    unlocked.
    SportCombi:
    The other
    doors and tailgate are
    unlocked.
    Sport Sedan:
    Unlocks and
    slightly opens
    the trunk lid.
    SportCombi:
    Unlocks the tailgate.
    Checks number
    of remote controls, see
    page 53.
    Turns on exterior
    Panic alarm
    and cabin light(activates
    ing *) (for 30 s) or
    alarm manuturns off lighting
    ally), see
    and deactivates
    page 58.
    panic alarm.

    *) parking lights, side direction indicators,
    taillights and license plate lighting.



  • Page 50

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 50 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    50

    Security

    Locking/unlocking the car
    WARNING
    Leaving children or pets unattended in a
    locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
    ignition key. A child or others could be
    badly injured or even killed.
    Never lock anyone in the car.
    Remote locking and unlocking also control
    the car alarm.
    Remote locking
    Press the

    button once:

    Sport Sedan: all doors locked.
    SportCombi: all doors and tailgate locked.
    The hazard warning lights will flash once to
    confirm.

    Remote unlocking
    Pressing the
    button once: the driver´s
    door is unlocked.
    Pressin a second time:
    Sport Sedan: the rest of the doors are
    unlocked.
    SportCombi: the rest of the doors and tailgate are unlocked.
    The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
    confirm.
    Saab Information Display (SID), see
    page 89.

    Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door
    with the traditional key

    Intermittent malfunctioning

    1 Lock
    2 Unlock

    Equipment in the vicinity of the car that uses
    the same frequency as the remote control
    may cause interference to the remote control signal. In this case, retry from another
    angle and aim at the receiver located by the
    steering wheel.

    If remote unlocking should fail to work
    1 Remove the traditional key from the
    remote control by pressing the emblem
    on the reverse of the remote control.
    (This key only fits the front left-hand
    door.)
    2 Unlock the door with the key.
    The car alarm will be tripped. To silence the
    alarm, insert the remote control into the ignition switch.



  • Page 51

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 51 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Security

    51

    Locking a car with dead battery

    Trunk lid/Tailgate

    The steering wheel lock requires sufficient
    battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the battery voltage drops below a certain level
    while the remote control is in the ignition
    switch, you will not be able to remove the
    remote control.

    Opening

    If you must leave the car, proceed as
    follows:

    SportCombi: The tailgate is unlocked (not

    1 Lock the car by pressing down the lock
    buttons on the doors.
    2 Lock the front left door from outside with
    the traditional key (see page 50). The
    car is now locked but the car alarm will
    remain inactive.

    Sport Sedan: The trunk lid is unlocked and
    slightly opened when the
    button on the
    remote control or on the inside of the driver’s
    door is pressed once.
    opened) when the
    button on the remote
    control or on the inside of the driver’s door
    is pressed once.

    Opening button on driver’s door

    The hazard warning lights will flash three
    times to confirm.
    Closing
    Sport Sedan: The trunk lid is locked when
    closed.
    SportCombi: The tailgate is not locked
    when closed. It is locked together with the
    doors when
    button on the remote control is pressed once.
    If the doors are locked when the trunk lid is
    closed it is armed and the movement sensor
    in the cabin will be armed.



  • Page 52

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 52 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    52

    Security

    Switches on front doors
    The central locking can also be operated
    from inside the car using the button by each
    front door handle.
    Locking the car with the remote control renders these buttons inoperative.
    Sport Sedan
    If you are sitting in the car and pressing the
    button on the driver’s door, the driver’s
    door will unlock. Pressing the button a
    second time will unlock the remaining
    doors.
    SportCombi
    If you are sitting in the car and pressing the
    button on the driver’s door, the driver’s
    door will unlock. Pressing the button a
    second time will unlock the remaining doors
    and the tailgate.

    Central locking switch
    The button on the passenger door works in
    the same way except that this first unlocks
    the passenger door. During this operation
    the rear doors remain locked.
    If the car is left with one or more doors open,
    the interior lighting will be switched off automatically after 20 minutes. This is to prevent
    the battery from running flat. Also, if the car
    has electrically adjustable seats, these will
    cease to operate.

    Child safety locks

    Child safety locks
    WARNING
    If small children are carried in the rear
    seat, the safety locks on the rear doors
    should be activated to prevent unintentional opening from the inside.



  • Page 53

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 53 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Security

    53

    Reprogramming lock system
    functions

    The rear doors are equipped with child
    safety locks that are activated by means of
    a catch next to the door latch.

    Certain lock system functions can be
    reprogrammed. We recommend that you
    contact a Saab dealer (see page 295).

    Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key
    (enclosed in the remote control) and turn it
    45°.

    Checking the number of remote
    controls

    When the child safety lock is in the locked
    position, the door can only be opened from
    outside the car.

    To check the number of remote controls that
    are programmed for the car:
    1 Insert the remote control into the ignition
    switch and turn it to ON.

    Trunk Release Handle

    Trunk Release Handle
    There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
    handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
    This handle will glow following exposure to
    light. Pull the release handle down to open
    the trunk from inside.

    2 Press and hold the
    button for more
    than 2 seconds within 30 seconds after
    the ignition switch has been turned to
    the ON position.
    3 The Saab Information Display (SID) will
    now display the number of remote
    controls that are programmed for your
    car, and which of these (1–5) is in the
    ignition switch.
    Example of SID message:

    NOTICE
    The trunk release handle was not
    designed to be used to tie down the trunk
    lid or as an anchor point when securing
    items in the trunk. Improper use of the
    trunk release could damage it

    Number of keys:
    Active key number:



  • Page 54

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 54 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    54

    Security

    Changing the key battery

    When the voltage of the remote control
    battery drops below a certain level, the
    Saab Information Display (SID) will display:

    WARNING
    Keep the battery and other small components of the remote control out of reach of
    children.

    NOTICE
    The electronics of the remote control are
    sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Incorrect handling when changing the battery
    can damage the remote control. Avoid
    touching electronic components of the
    remote control with your hands.

    Remote control battery
    low. Replace battery.
    Change the battery as soon as possible to
    avoid malfunctioning.
    Battery type: For optimum performance in
    all temperatures and good service life, Saab
    recommends the use of a Sony or Panasonic CR2032, 3V lithium battery.
    The battery should last for about 4 years of
    normal use.
    The battery type is marked on the inside of
    the remote control. Avoid leaving fingerprints on the faces of the battery.

    Press the emblem to remove
    the traditional key
    1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the
    remote control to remove the traditional
    key.
    2 Insert the tip of the key into the small slot
    and turn the key to split the remote
    control.



  • Page 55

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 55 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Security
    5 After changing the battery in the remote
    control, it is only possible to use the
    remote control a limited number of times
    before synchronization with the car is
    lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons
    on the remote control repeatedly directly
    after changing the battery.
    Unlock the car and insert the remote
    control into the ignition switch to
    synchronize the remote control and car.

    Change the battery and fit together
    the two halves of the remote control
    3 Change the battery. Fit the new battery
    so that it is positioned in the same way
    as the old battery, with the positive (+)
    side facing down.
    4 Fit the two halves of the remote control
    together and press them together until
    you hear several clicks. Avoid pressing
    the buttons. Reinsert the traditional key
    into the remote control.

    If the central locking system does not work
    after changing the battery and the car is
    locked, proceed as follows:
    1 Unlock the front left door with the traditional key. If the car has a car alarm, this
    will be tripped.
    2 Open the door and insert the remote
    control into the ignition switch. If the car
    has a car alarm, this will be silenced.
    The remote control and receiver unit are
    now synchronized.

    55

    Immobilizer
    The remote control contains an electronic
    code that is unique to your car. When the
    remote control is inserted into the ignition
    switch, this code is checked and the LED on
    the dashboard double-flashes for
    3 seconds. If the code is correct, the car can
    be started.
    Each time you remove the remote control
    from the ignition, the electronic starting
    interlock is activated, the LED doubleflashes for 3 seconds and the car becomes
    immobilized. If an incorrect remote control is
    now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g.
    the remote control of another car), the
    immobilizer will remain operative (the LED
    will not flash for 3 s) and it will not be possible to start the car.
    If, when inserted into the ignition switch,
    there is a problem checking the electronic
    code of the remote control, the following
    message will appear on the SID:
    Key not accepted.
    Contact service.
    Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem
    checked and rectified.



  • Page 56

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 56 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    56

    Security

    Car alarm

    The alarm is armed 11 seconds after the car
    has been locked by remote control.

    WARNING
    Leaving children or pets unattended in a
    locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
    ignition key. A child or others could be
    badly injured or even killed.
    The car alarm is armed when the car is
    locked with the remote control.
    The car alarm will not be armed if you
    lock the car with the traditional key (see
    page 50).
    All the doors, the hood and the trunk lid are
    monitored by the alarm.

    During the delay period, the LED shines
    constantly. It will then start to flash once
    every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the
    dashboard.
    If a door or the trunk lid is open when the car
    is locked with the remote control, the LED
    will flash 3 times per second for
    11 seconds. Check that the doors, hood
    and trunk lid are closed.
    If the signal persists, contact a Saab dealer
    to have the problem checked and rectified.

    Locking the trunk lid:
    Sport Sedan
    If you open the trunk lid from outside the car
    with the

    button on the remote control,

    you must lock the car with the
    arm the car alarm.

    button to

    SportCombi
    If you unlock and/or open the trunk lid from
    outside the car with the
    button on the
    remote control, you must lock the car with
    the

    button to arm the car alarm.



  • Page 57

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 57 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Security
    To avoid any inconvenience, make sure that
    anyone using the car is familiar with how the
    car alarm and the locking system work.
    If the alarm has been tripped since the car
    was last locked, the Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
    Alarm tripped during
    last arming period.
    If a fault arises in the car alarm system, the
    Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
    Theft protection failure.
    Contact service.

    Arming the car alarm
    The alarm is armed when all doors, the hood
    and the trunk lid are closed and you lock the
    car with the remote control.

    What trips the alarm?
    The alarm will be tripped if:
    • a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened
    • somebody tries to hotwire the car

    Signals when the alarm is tripped
    If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
    signals will be set off:
    • all direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.
    • the horn sounds for 30-second intervals
    with 10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles).
    The signals can vary between markets
    and due to legal and insurance requirements.
    Switching off the alarm if tripped
    If the alarm has been triggered (direction
    indicators flashing and horn sounding) it can
    be turned off by pressing one of the buttons
    on the remote control or, if you are sitting in
    the car, by turning the ignition to ON (see
    below).
    Turns off lights and horn.
    Unlocks car.
    Turns off lights and horn.
    Car remains locked.
    Turns off lights and horn.
    Unlocks trunk.
    Turns off lights and horn.
    Turns on exterior and cabin lighting. Car remains locked.
    If sitting in the car: Turn the remote
    control to ON in the ignition switch

    57

    NOTICE
    • It is possible to inadvertently deactivate the car alarm and at the same
    time unlock the car, if the button on the
    key is pressed by mistake when the
    car is still within its range.
    • When locking the car by remote
    control in extremely cold weather, it is
    advisable to check that the lock
    system has operated properly. To do
    so, check that the interior locking
    buttons are all down.
    If not, unlock and relock the car again.



  • Page 58

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 58 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    58

    Security

    Panic function

    Overview of functions

    The car alarm includes a panic function. This function allows the
    alarm to be started manually, for example, to attract attention.

    Locking/arming

    Direction indicators flash once.

    Unlocking/
    disarming

    Direction indicators flash twice.

    When the alarm is tripped, the lights and horn come on for 3 minutes
    or until you press one of the remote control buttons.

    Unlocking/
    disarming trunk
    lid

    Direction indicators flash three times.

    To start the alarm manually proceed as follows:

    Alarm triggered

    Direction indicators flash for 5 min.
    The horn sounds for 30-second intervals with
    10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you
    press one of the remote control buttons or turn
    the remote control ON in the ignition switch.

    Remote control

    Normal range: 5–16 yds. (5–15 metres).
    In favorable conditions the range can be significantly greater.

    Remote control
    battery

    Normal life: approx. 4 years.
    Change the battery when the SID displays:
    Remote control battery
    low. Replace battery.
    See Changing the key battery, page 54.

    The panic alarm can only be activated while the car is stationary.
    The alarm is silenced if the car is driven off.

    • Press and hold the
    button on the remote control for more than
    2 seconds, or if you are sitting in the car...
    • Press and hold the
    or
    for more than 2 seconds.

    button on one of the front doors

    To switch off the alarm:
    • Press one of the remote control buttons or, if you are sitting in the
    car, the

    or

    buttons on one of the front doors.

    Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.
    Contact a Saab dealer for details of the possibilities and refer to
    page 295.



  • Page 59

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 59 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Security

    59

    Quick guide, LED and Saab Information Display
    (SID) messages
    Activity

    LED signal

    SID message

    Reason/action

    Arming (delay period)

    Illuminates for 11 s.

    Alarm armed

    Flashes once every 3 s.

    Key not accepted.
    Contact service.

    Error when remote control
    inserted into ignition switch.

    Disarming

    Extinguishes.

    Remote control battery
    low. Replace battery.

    Battery needs replacing.
    See page 54.

    Alarm not armed

    Off.

    Number of keys:
    Active key number:

    Check of the number of remote
    controls programmed for your
    car. See page 53.

    Alarm tripped during
    last arming period.

    The alarm has been tripped
    since the car was last locked.

    A door, the hood or the tailgate is Flashes for 11 s then flashes
    open or opened during the delay once every 3 s.
    period.
    Car immobilized but not locked.

    Off.

    Change of status of immobilizer Double-flashes for 3 s.
    system, valid remote control
    inserted or removed from ignition
    switch.



  • Page 60

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 60 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    60

    Security

    (This page has been left blank.)



  • Page 61

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 61 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    61

    9-3 Convertible
    Advice on soft top
    operation ___________
    Operating the soft top __
    Raising the soft top
    manually ___________
    SID warnings and
    messages __________
    "Easy entry"__________
    Head restraints _______
    Safety belts, rear seat,
    Convertible _________

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    62
    63
    68
    71
    73
    74
    75

    Rollover Pop-up Bars ___
    Electric windows _______
    Interior lighting ________
    Unlocking the trunk lid
    manually ____________
    Placing two golf bags
    in the trunk __________

    76
    77
    78
    79
    80



  • Page 62

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 62 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    62

    9-3 Convertible

    Advice on soft top
    operation
    • Once you have raised the soft top and
    before driving off, always check that the
    soft top is properly engaged with the windshield rail, see page 66.
    • Once you have folded the soft top and
    before driving off, check that the soft top
    cover is locked, see page 64.
    • Do not operate the soft top in temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).
    • Note that certain automatic car washes
    can damage the soft top. This applies to
    car washes that use mechanical feelers
    bearing against the body. Saab advises
    against washing the Convertible in an
    automatic car wash.
    • After rain or washing the car, allow the
    soft top to dry completely before folding it.
    Folding a wet or damp soft top can cause
    water damage in the car and mildew to
    form on the soft top.

    • Roof racks and ski holders must not be
    mounted on the soft top.
    • On no account should anything be put into
    the stowage space of the soft top (under
    the soft top cover) since this could cause
    an obstruction when the soft top is being
    folded away.
    • Do not place any objects on the covers
    over the roll bars as this can hamper their
    function.
    • When operating the soft top, raise or fold
    it fully until notified that operation is
    complete by the SID. Do not leave the soft
    top partially open/closed. If the soft top is
    left in an intermediate position it will
    collapse progressively after 20 seconds
    to prevent overloading the drive system.
    • Washing the soft top, see page 261.

    WARNING
    • Never touch the hinges and struts of
    the soft top nor the upper rail of the
    windshield while operating the soft
    top.
    • Do not operate the soft top while there
    are bystanders close to the car.



  • Page 63

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 63 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    Operating the soft top
    WARNING
    • Do not touch the hinges or struts of the
    soft top during opening due to the
    pinch hazard.
    • Keep children out of reach.
    • Do not operate the soft top while there
    are bystanders close to the car.
    • Make sure that the soft top cover has
    locked properly after folding the soft
    top.
    • Check that the soft top engages properly with the upper edge of the windshield after raising.

    NOTICE
    If you drive off while raising or folding the
    soft top, operation is halted when
    the speed of the car exceeds 20 mph
    (30 km/h). This speed can be
    programmed (0–20 mph/0–30 km/h). We
    recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer. The movement of the car and
    force of the wind can seriously damage
    the components of the soft top system.

    Read the "Advice on soft top operation"
    section on page 62 before operating the soft
    top.
    The soft top is operated with the switch on
    the instrument panel. Hold the switch in the
    desired position until the soft top is fully
    folded or raised.
    The completion of folding or raising the soft
    top is indicated by a chime.
    Error messages that can appear on the SID
    are shown on page 71.

    Switch for operating the soft top
    a Raising
    b Folding

    63



  • Page 64

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 64 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    64

    9-3 Convertible

    Opening

    2 Press and hold the soft top button until
    the soft top is fully folded and the soft top
    cover raised. Completed folding is indicated by a chime. If there is a malfunction a text message will be shown on the
    SID. Refer to page 71.
    Do not press any of the buttons on the
    same section of the instrument panel as
    the soft top switch while folding the soft
    top. This will cause the soft top to stop
    and then sink after about 20 seconds.

    The following conditions must be fulfilled for
    the soft top to be folded:
    • Vehicle speed must not exceed 20 mph
    (30 km/h).
    • Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
    • Outside temperature must exceed 23°F
    (–5°C).
    • The trunk lid must be locked.
    • There must be sufficient space in the
    trunk for the soft top.

    Folding

    If you continue to hold the button after the
    chime, all the windows will open after a brief
    delay.
    Remote opening 3
    You can fold the soft top when outside the

    1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance
    for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
    (2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).

    car by pressing and holding the
    (unlock) button on the remote control. See
    also page 119.



  • Page 65

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 65 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    1 Rear window raised. Soft top storage in
    luggage compartment lowered.
    2 The soft top cover is opened.

    a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
    b 2" (5 cm)

    3 Soft top folded.

    4 The soft top cover is closed.

    65



  • Page 66

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 66 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    66

    9-3 Convertible

    Raising

    2 Press and hold the soft top button until
    the soft top is fully raised and the soft top
    cover closed. Completed raising is indicated by a chime. If there is a malfunction a text message will be shown on the
    SID. Refer to page 71.
    Do not press any of the buttons on the
    same section of the instrument panel as
    the soft top switch while raising the soft
    top. This will cause the soft top to stop
    and then sink after about 20 seconds.

    The following conditions must be fulfilled for
    raising the soft top:
    • Vehicle speed must not exceed
    20 mph (30 km/h).
    • Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
    • The trunk lid must be locked.

    Raising

    1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance
    for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
    (2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).

    All side windows are opened slightly to protect the seals when the soft top is raised.
    Check that the hooks in the soft top hold it
    securely to the upper edge of the windshield.
    If you hold the button pressed up after the
    chime, all the windows will be closed after a
    short delay.



  • Page 67

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 67 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    1 The soft top cover is opened.

    a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
    b 2" (5 cm

    2 The soft top is raised.

    3 The soft top cover is closed.
    4 The rear window is lowered.

    67



  • Page 68

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 68 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    68

    9-3 Convertible

    Raising the soft top
    manually
    WARNING
    Only raise the soft top manually in an
    emergency (e.g. due to an electrical
    fault).
    Do not touch the soft top button on the
    instrument panel while closing the soft top
    manually. This could cause personal
    injury and damage the soft top mechanism.
    Do not fold the soft top having closed it
    manually. This can damage the soft top
    mechanism.
    If the soft top has been folded mechanically
    there will be a delay of 20 seconds before it
    is possible to raise it manually (the pressure
    must be released from the hydraulic system).
    If the car is without electrical power, the
    trunk must be unlocked manually. Refer to
    page 79.

    Wire catch for unlocking soft top cover

    1 Find the lug wrench, Allen key and
    screwdriver located under the luggage
    compartment floor.
    2 Remove the two covers from the side
    trim in the trunk, one from either side.
    If there are two of you, it is easiest if you
    stand on either side of the car and perform
    steps 3-6 and 9-10 together.
    3 Unlock the soft top cover by pressing
    forward the two wire catches, one on the
    left and one on right-hand side.

    Tools under luggage compartment floor



  • Page 69

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 69 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    Soft top cover opened

    4 Close the trunk lid fully as otherwise it
    will obstruct the soft top cover.
    5 Open the soft top cover, upward and
    backward.
    6 Tip forward the front seat backrests.

    Manual closing started

    WARNING
    • Do not touch the hinges and struts of
    the soft top during raising.
    • Keep your hands clear of the front
    windshield rail.
    • Pinch hazard may cause personal
    injury.

    69

    Soft top pulled towards windshield

    7 Before raising the soft top, the two
    catches in the leading edge of the soft
    top must be opened. Stand in the rear
    seat and pry off the cover with the screwdriver (the cover is fitted on the covering
    in between the catches). Using the tool,
    turn clockwise to open the catches.
    Stand in the rear seat and raise the soft
    top. Pull it towards the windshield. This
    operation requires 7.2 ft (2.2 m) of vertical clearance.



  • Page 70

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 70 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    70

    9-3 Convertible

    Soft top locked to windshield rail

    Closing the soft top cover

    8 Sit in one of the front seats and lock the
    soft top to the windshield rail. Use the lug
    wrench and the Allen key. Turn roughly
    1/4 turn counterclockwise. Check that
    the soft top is properly locked in place by
    pressing up the front edge. The soft top
    must not move upward.

    9 Lift up the rear window fully and hold it
    there. Close the soft top cover. It is not
    possible to lock the soft top cover after
    manual raising.

    NOTICE
    To avoid damaging the paintwork on the
    soft top cover and the trunk lid, take care
    when closing the soft top cover.
    10 Press down the rear edge of the soft top
    as far as possible towards the soft top
    cover.

    Rear window locked to soft top cover

    11 Now lock the rear window to the soft top
    cover. Sit in the rear seat and insert the
    tool (the same tool as used to lock the
    soft top to the windshield rail) into the
    hexagonal hole in the soft top mechanism. Turn roughly 1/4 turn, counterclockwise on the right had side of the
    soft top and clockwise on the left-hand
    side. Look at the soft top cover when
    locking the rear window. The rear
    window must make a tight seal against
    the soft top cover.
    The soft top system must be checked and
    rectified without delay. We recommend that
    you contact a Saab dealer.



  • Page 71

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 71 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    71

    SID warnings and messages
    The following messages associated with the soft top system and can be displayed on the SID together with a chime:

    Soft top front
    not locked.

    Soft top power pack
    overheated.

    Cause

    Suitable action

    Failure of the soft top to lock automatically to
    the windshield.

    • Move the car so that it is standing level if on
    a steep slope.
    • Press the soft top button to fold the soft top
    slightly. Fold the soft top again.

    This message appears if the soft top is operated Wait 6 minutes to allow the hydraulic pump to
    continuously for more than 3 minutes.
    cool down.
    Move the object hindering soft top operation.

    Move goods away from
    soft top storage area.
    Operation at low temp.
    may damage soft top.
    Only manual operation
    possible.
    Soft top cover not
    locked. Try again.

    Displayed if the soft top is folded at temperatures
    below 23°F (–5°C).



  • Page 72

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 72 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    72

    9-3 Convertible
    Battery low.

    The voltage of the car battery is too low to allow
    soft top operation.

    Soft top obstructed.
    Clear obstacles.
    Complete soft top
    operation to open trunk.

    Complete soft top operation.

    Complete soft top
    operation before driving

    Complete soft top operation.

    Close doors.

    Close the trunk lid.

    Driver seat unlocked.

    The backrest is not locked.

    Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
    page 73.

    Passenger front seat
    unlocked.

    The backrest is not locked.

    Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
    page 73.



  • Page 73

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 73 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    73

    "Easy entry"
    WARNING
    • Always check that the backrest locks
    properly when returned to normal
    position.
    • Check that the fore-and-aft position of
    the seat is properly locked. The backrest and the entire belt-in seat must be
    locked in position; otherwise the occupant of the seat is at risk of injury
    during braking or in the event of a
    crash, especially if a rear-facing child
    seat is fitted behind the backrest.
    To facilitate getting in and out of the rear
    seat, the front seats can be slid forward.
    Manually adjusted passenger seats 3
    1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
    on the seat.
    2 Tip the backrest and slide the seat
    forward.
    Repositioning:
    1 Tip back the backrest.
    2 Slide the seat back to the desired
    position.
    Make sure the backrest and seat are properly locked in position.

    "Easy entry" function. Illustration shows an electrically adjustable seat 3
    Electrically adjustable front seats 3
    1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
    on the seat.
    2 Tip the backrest forward.
    3 The seat now moves to its foremost
    position.
    Repositioning:
    1 Tip the backrest back to its normal
    position.
    2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
    has returned to its previous position.

    Repositioning (seats without memory):
    1 Tip the backrest back but not to its
    normal position.
    2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
    has returned to its previous position.
    3 Release the handle and move the backrest to locked position.



  • Page 74

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 74 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    74

    9-3 Convertible

    Head restraints
    WARNING
    • Adjust the head restraint so that the
    head is optimally supported and the
    center of the head restraint is at ear
    height, thus reducing the likelihood of
    neck injury in a crash.
    • Raise the head restraints in the seats
    that are occupied.
    The front seats are equipped with Saab
    Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These are
    designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
    the car is hit from behind.
    The SAHR is a mechanical system, actuated by body weight. The mechanism is built
    into the top of the backrest, where it is connected to the head restraint.
    In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
    forced back against the backrest. This, in
    turn, causes the mechanism to press the
    head restraint forward and upward, thus limiting the backward movement of the head.
    The front seat head restraints must be set at
    a height where at least one notch is visible
    on the rear of the head restraint stem (pole).
    In this position the vertical distance between
    the top of the seat back and the head
    restraint should be greater than 30 mm
    when measured at the rear. See page 23.

    Front head restraint
    Under no circumstances should the front
    seat head restraint be forced down below
    this position.

    Rear head restraint
    The front head restraints can be raised and
    lowered to a number of positions, the rear
    has two positions.
    • Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
    sides and pull it straight up.
    • Lowering: Press the head restraint
    forward and downward.
    The rear head restraints can be fully lowered to improve rearward vision when the
    rear seats are unoccupied.



  • Page 75

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 75 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    Safety belts, rear seat,
    Convertible
    The two rear seats have three-point safety
    belts with inertia reels.
    Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and inserting the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
    securely fastened.
    Position the lap part low across the hips.
    Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
    and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
    tighten the lap belt part.
    The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible.
    Press the red button on the belt buckle to
    release the belt.
    Refer to page 260 for how to check the function of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.

    Safety belts, rear seat, Convertible

    WARNING
    • If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
    must be properly secured with the
    safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
    cargo being thrown about during hard
    braking or a crash, which could cause
    personal injury.
    • Check that the belt is not twisted or
    lying against sharp edges.
    • Make sure you use the correct seatbelt buckle.
    For how to secure loads on the rear seat,
    refer to page 17.

    75



  • Page 76

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 76 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    76

    9-3 Convertible

    Rollover Pop-up Bars
    The Rollover Pop Up Bars, which are
    located behind each rear seat head
    restraint, are designed to deploy in the
    event of a crash or rollover.

    WARNING
    You can be severely injured or killed in a
    crash if you are not wearing your safety
    belt - even if you have airbags and Rollover Pop Up Bars. Wearing your safety
    belt during a crash helps reduce your
    chance of hitting things inside the vehicle
    or being ejected from it.
    • The Rollover Pop Up Bars have
    powerful springs that rapidly extend
    the bars in rollover crashes, as well as
    in moderate to severe crashes in
    which the airbags deploy. Rollover
    Pop Up Bars are supplemental to the
    safety belts. They are designed to
    work with safety belts but do not
    replace them.

    • Rollover Pop Up Bars deploy with
    great force, and you could be injured if
    your arm or other body part, or if an
    object is covering the bars when they
    deploy. Don't put anything on the
    cover of the Rollover Pop Up Bars.
    The path of the Rollover Pop Up Bars
    must be kept clear.
    • The Rollover Pop Up Bars are
    designed to deploy only once. If they
    deploy, take your vehicle to a workshop immediately to have the Rollover
    Pop Up Bars repaired so that they
    operate properly in the event of a
    crash or rollover. We recommend that
    you contact a Saab dealer.

    NOTICE
    To avoid the risk of damage to the soft top
    do not operated the soft top while the
    bars are extended.

    Rollover Pop-up Bars



  • Page 77

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 77 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible

    Electric windows

    To close
    Soft top raised – The windows are operated
    individually.

    WARNING

    Soft top folded – The button for the front
    window closes both side windows.

    Bear in mind the pinch hazard when closing the side windows. May cause serious
    or fatal injuries!
    • Always remove the remote control
    from the ignition switch when you
    leave the car to prevent personal
    injury caused by the activation of the
    electric windows, for example, due to
    children playing.
    • The person operating the electric
    window is responsible for ensuring
    that no one, especially a child, has
    their head, hands or fingers in the
    window openings, before raising the
    window.
    • Do not stick any part of the body or the
    head out through an open window
    while the car is moving.

    77

    Automatic closing of a front side window
    Raise the button all the way and release it.
    The rear side window must be fully closed.
    Pinch protection 3 is available for the front
    side windows.

    Window switches

    For further information on the electric windows, refer to page 119.

    Deactivating the passenger door
    window button
    To open
    Soft top raised – The windows open individually.

    With the
    button on the driver’s door,
    you can deactivate the window button on
    the passenger door.

    Soft top folded – The button for the front
    window opens both side windows.

    The illuminated switch will change color
    from green to amber (deactivated).

    Automatic opening
    Press the button all the way down and
    release it. If the soft top is folded, the rear
    side window is also lowered.



  • Page 78

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 78 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    78

    9-3 Convertible

    Calibrating front electric
    windows with pinch protection 3
    The window lifts should be calibrated if automatic closing does not work or if the battery
    has been disconnected. The pinch protection will not work if the windows are not
    calibrated.
    Perform calibration as follows:
    1 Make sure the soft top is raised.
    2 Make sure the doors are closed.
    3 Let the engine idle.
    4 Press and hold the soft top button up
    until a chime sounds.
    During calibration, the four windows will
    be raised and lowered several times.
    If calibration fails twice in a row, have the car
    checked and rectified. We recommend that
    you contact a Saab dealer.

    Interior lighting
    The interior lighting consists of a front roof
    light, two front reading lights, footwell lighting and courtesy lighting in the doors. The
    light switches are located in the roof console.
    The cabin lighting comes on:
    • When a door is opened and the ignition is
    OFF.
    • When the remote control is removed from
    the ignition switch.

    Front interior lighting - Convertible
    The lighting goes out:
    • When the car is locked.
    • When the ignition is turned on.
    • Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
    The lights are dimmed out gradually.
    If a door is left open with the ignition OFF,
    the interior lighting goes out automatically
    after 5 min so as not to drain the battery.
    The interior lighting can be switched off
    completely.
    1 Open the driver’s door.
    2 Turn off the cabin lighting with the center
    button, see illustration.
    This is canceled when the ignition switch is
    turned to position ON or when the car is
    locked with the remote control.

    1 Left-hand reading light
    2 Cabin light
    3 Right-hand reading light



  • Page 79

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 79 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    9-3 Convertible
    Glove box
    The glove box lighting comes on when the
    compartment is opened and goes out when
    it is closed.
    For changing bulbs, refer to page 230.

    Sun visor
    An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on
    the inside of the sun visors. The lighting
    comes on when the cover is raised and goes
    out when it is closed.

    Trunk lighting
    The trunk lighting comes on and goes out
    when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
    If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
    switched off automatically after 20 min to
    prevent the battery from running flat.
    For changing bulbs, refer to page 232.

    Unlocking the trunk lid
    manually
    If the trunk lid is not unlocked by the central
    locking system, it can be unlocked
    manually.
    1 Take the traditional key out of the
    remote control by pressing the emblem
    on the reverse (see page 54).
    2 Carefully prise off the round cover using
    your nails, a credit card or similar so as
    not to damage the paintwork.
    3 Unlock the trunk lid using the traditional
    key.
    We recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer to have the central locking system
    checked.

    Unlocking the trunk lid manually

    79



  • Page 80

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 80 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    80

    9-3 Convertible

    Placing two golf bags
    in the trunk
    There is sufficient space in the trunk of the
    Convertible for two golf bags. Proceed as
    follows.
    1 Start by inserting the narrow end of the
    first bag to the right.
    2 Lie down the bag. Turn the bag so that it
    lies on its widest side and slide it
    forward, in under the soft top storage
    (see illustration).
    3 Put in the second bag in the same way
    as the first, but lie it on its narrow side
    (see illustration).

    Position of first golf bag

    Position of second golf bag

    Spoiler on trunklid 3
    WARNING
    Some models have a spoiler on the trunklid. Avoid getting fingers and hands
    trapped between the spoiler and rear
    fender when closing the trunklid.

    Wind deflector 3
    A wind deflector is available as an accessory. Follow the fitting instructions supplied
    with the wind deflector carefully.



  • Page 81

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 81 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls

    81

    Instruments and controls
    Warning and indicator
    lights _______________
    Instruments ___________
    Saab Information Display
    (SID)________________
    Switches _____________
    Wipers and washers ____
    Automatic climatecontrol system (ACC)__

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    82
    87
    89
    97
    101
    106



  • Page 82

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 82 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    82

    Instruments and controls

    Warning and indicator
    lights

    Main instrument panel

    The warnings and indications that can be
    shown depend on the engine variant and
    equipment level.

    Antilock braking warning
    This warning light illuminates when a fault
    arises in the antilock brake system.
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Antilock brake malfunc.
    Contact service.

    U.S. shown, Canada similar
    Main instrument panel
    1
    2
    3
    4

    Tachometer
    Speedometer
    Turbo gauge
    Fuel gauge

    5 Engine temperature gauge
    6 Information display
    7 Trip meter reset button

    The brake system will continue to function
    but without ABS modulation. See also
    page 170.



  • Page 83

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 83 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Warning, oil pressure
    (engine oil)

    Charge warning light
    This light comes on when the battery is not
    being charged by the alternator. If the light
    comes on during driving, stop as soon as
    possible and switch off the engine.
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):

    This light will come on if the engine oil pressure is too low. If the warning light flashes or
    comes on while you are driving, stop immediately in a safe place, switch off the engine
    and check the oil level (see page 207).

    NOTICE
    Battery not charging.
    Make a safe stop.

    Never drive the car when the oil pressure
    warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can
    cause serious engine damage.

    Check the drive belt, see page 216.
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Oil pressure low.
    Make a safe stop.

    83

    Engine malfunction
    (CHECK ENGINE)
    WARNING
    An illuminated “Engine malfunction
    (CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indicates an engine-related problem. While
    your car may be able to be driven with the
    “Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
    indicator light illuminated (limp-home
    mode), you are advised to have your car
    serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
    soon as possible.
    Continued driving without this problem
    being corrected might cause serious
    further damage to your car and create
    unsafe driving conditions. The operator
    should be prepared to take action if such
    unsafe conditions arise (e.g. brake
    smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suitable place, switch off the engine, etc.)



  • Page 84

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 84 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    84

    Instruments and controls

    This light indicates a malfunction in the fuel
    or ignition system. The car may still be
    driven with care but the performance of the
    engine will be somewhat diminished (see
    page 154).
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Reduced engine power.
    Contact service.

    NOTICE

    Front fog lights 3
    This light indicates when the front fog lights
    are on (see page 99).
    The front fog lights are switched off automatically when the engine is switched off.
    When the fog lights are next needed, they
    will have to be switched on manually.

    Brake warning light

    The car should be checked immediately
    at a Saab dealer to prevent more serious
    faults from arising.

    High beam Indicator
    This light shows when the high beam is on
    (see page 98).

    This light should come on briefly when you
    turn the ignition key to ON. If it doesn´t come
    on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
    you if there is a problem. This light indicates
    when the brake fluid level is too low (see
    page 211).
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Brake fluid level low.
    Make a safe stop.

    WARNING
    • Never drive the car if these two lights
    are on at the same time. Danger of
    brake failure!
    • If the level of brake fluid in the reservoir is below the MIN mark, the vehicle
    should be transported on a recovery
    vehicle.
    • Have the brake system checked
    immediately at a Saab dealer.
    For safety reasons, stop the car and check
    the level of the brake fluid (see page 211).
    If the level is normal, depress the brake
    pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
    the level again. If the level is still normal, you
    may drive the car, with considerable caution, to the nearest workshop to have the
    brake system checked. We recommend
    that you contact a Saab dealer.



  • Page 85

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 85 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    The brake system provides Electronic
    Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distributes the brake pressure between the front
    and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve
    optimum braking performance irrespective
    of the car’s load.
    If a fault arises in the EBD function, the

    ,

    and
    lights will come on. Also, the
    following message will appear on the Saab
    Information Display (SID):
    Brake malfunction.
    Make a safe stop.
    If this is the case, drive carefully and contact
    a workshop as soon as possible. We recommend that you contact a Saab dealer. Refer
    to Brake warning light on page 84, Antilock
    braking warning on page 82 and ESP® OFF
    indicator on page 86.

    Safetybelt reminder

    Parking brake warning
    light
    This light comes on when the parking brake
    is applied (see page 177).
    The parking brake is mechanical and operates on the rear wheels.
    If the parking brake is applied when the car
    starts off, the following message will appear
    on the SID:
    Release park brake.

    WARNING
    • Always apply the parking brake when
    parking, see page 177.
    • Always apply the parking brake
    before removing the remote control.
    • Do not apply the parking brake while
    the car is moving.

    This light reminds the driver to buckle up,
    see page 12.

    Airbag warning light
    This light comes on if a potentially serious
    fault has occurred in the airbag system, see
    also page 32.

    85

    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Airbag malfunction.
    Contact service.

    WARNING
    • If the airbag readiness light stays on
    after you start your vehicle, it means
    the airbag system may not be working
    properly. One or more of the following
    conditions may occur:
    - Non-deployment of the airbags in the
    event of a crash.
    - Deployment of the airbags without a
    crash.
    - Deployment of the airbags in crashes
    less severe than intended.
    • To help avoid injury to yourself or
    others, have your vehicle serviced
    right away if the airbag readiness light
    stays on after you start your vehicle.
    This light will come on for about four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
    the Start or Drive position.



  • Page 86

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 86 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    86

    Instruments and controls
    This symbol lights up when the system is
    disengaged using the ESP® button.

    Indicator, fuel
    This light comes on when there is less than
    about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the
    tank.

    NOTICE
    If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
    in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
    the catalytic converter to be damaged by
    overheating.

    Headlight and parking
    light indicator
    This light indicates that the headlights or
    parking lights are on.

    Cruise control indicator
    light
    This light comes on when the system is
    engaged.

    ESP® indicator
    This symbol lights up when the system is
    operative.
    Operation of the ESP® indicates reduced
    cohesion between the tires and the road,
    and that extra care should be taken by the
    driver.

    ESP® OFF indicator

    WARNING
    The system improves ride comfort and
    safety during normal driving. It must
    however not be regarded as a system
    to enable the driver to maintain higher
    speeds. The same precautions as
    normal for safe cornering and driving
    on slippery roads must be adopted (see
    pages 173/ 175).

    If there is a malfunction, the symbol cannot
    be turned off by pressing the ESP® button.
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Stability control failure.
    Contact service.
    If so, have the system checked at a Saab
    dealer.
    See also Electronic Stability Program
    (ESP® ) 3 on page 175.



  • Page 87

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 87 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls

    Autochecking of lights, main
    instrument panel

    Instruments

    The warning and indicator lights shown
    above should come on when the ignition
    switch is turned to ON. They should go out
    after about 4 seconds once the engine has
    started or after the fault-free self-diagnosis
    of each system or function.

    Tachometer

    87

    Speedometer
    (U.S. speedometer shown)

    The tachometer displays the engine speed
    in thousands of revolutions per minute.

    Cars sold in U.S.: The speedometer displays the speed of the car in miles per hour
    (mph).

    A protective function (interruption of the fuel
    supply) limits the engine speed within the
    red zone.

    Cars sold in Canada: The speedometer
    displays the speed of the car in kilometres
    per hour (km/h).
    It receives information about vehicle speed
    from the ABS’s wheel sensors.



  • Page 88

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 88 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    88

    Instruments and controls
    NOTICE
    If the needle, despite the above action,
    enters the red zone, stop the car in a suitable place and allow the engine to idle. If
    the needle continues to rise, switch off the
    engine.
    If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,
    stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and
    check the coolant level (see page 209).

    WARNING

    Temperature gauge
    The temperature gauge shows the temperature of the coolant. The needle should be
    in the middle of the scale when the engine
    is at normal operating temperature.
    If the needle goes into the red zone (which
    can occur at high outside air temperatures
    or under heavy engine loads), choose the
    highest possible gear ratio and the lowest
    possible engine speed, and avoid shifting
    down.

    Never open the cap of the expansion tank
    completely when the engine is hot, open
    with care. The pressure in the coolingsystem can cause hot coolant and steam
    to be released. Failure to heed this warning may result in personal injury.

    Turbo gauge
    The turbo gauge indicates the air volume
    used for combustion, which is equivalent to
    the engine load.
    At low loads and when the engine is used for
    braking, the needle will move within the
    white zone.
    Under certain barometric conditions the
    needle may enter the first part of the red
    zone without necessarily indicating that a
    fault has arisen.



  • Page 89

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 89 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls

    89

    Saab Information
    Display (SID)

    If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
    and the engine at the same time loses
    power, because the monitoring system is
    limiting the boost pressure, you should
    contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.

    • Various types of information are shown
    on the SID: warnings, indications, trip
    computer information and information
    from the car’s Infotainment System.

    If the speed of the car exceeds 143 mph
    (230 km/h), acceleration is limited by reducing the boost pressure. The pressure gauge
    then moves towards the middle of the white
    field, indicating a drop in engine power and
    consequently the car’s speed.

    Fuel gauge
    When less than about 2.5 gallons (10 litre)
    of fuel is left in the tank, a warning light on
    the main instrument panel comes on.
    Refueling, see page 157.

    • Selected gear is shown on the left-hand
    side of the display. When gears are
    selected manually, the letter M (manual)
    and the selected gear are displayed (see
    page 168) (cars with automatic transmission).
    • In the first row trip computer information is
    displayed and in the second row odometer and tripmeter is displayed.
    When a message is displayed
    The odometer and tripmeter is temporarely
    turned off when a two row message is displayed. The icon is displayed in the left part
    of the display.
    The warnings and indications that can be
    shown on the SID are listed on page 296.
    If there is more than one message on the
    SID, a plus sign will be displayed to the left
    of the first message. Each message will be
    displayed for 10 seconds.



  • Page 90

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 90 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    90

    Instruments and controls
    Trip computer function of the SID

    Press the CLR button to acknowledge a SID
    message. If you acknowledge a message
    but do nothing about it, the message will be
    displayed again the next time you start the
    car.

    WARNING
    It is strongly recommended that the SID
    settings be changed only when the car is
    stationary. The driver’s attention can
    otherwise easily be distracted from the
    road.

    When the engine is switched off the warning/indicator lights still active are displayed,
    this is to remind the driver. At this point the
    warning/indicator lights previously acknowledged with the CLR button are also displayed.
    You can adjust the settings of several of the
    car’s systems, such as the alarm 3, rain
    sensor 3 and climate control system. These
    are known as Settings se page 94.

    Odometer and trip meter
    The odometer records the distance travelled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian vehicles the distance indicated is in
    kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and
    tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres
    on Canadian vehicles).xx

    SID is available in two levels, SID1 and
    SID2. which one xx that your car has
    depends on the car´s equipment level.

    SID, control unit and display
    SID1 contains the following functions:

    Reset button

    Temp

    Outdoor temperature

    D.T.E.

    Estimated range (distance to
    empty fuel tank).
    When the possible range is
    less than 18 miles (30 km)
    then the text Refill fuel now
    is displayed.

    Fuel Ø

    Average fuel consumption
    since function last reset

    The reset button is positioned immediately
    to the left of the speedometer.
    Press once to resets the trip meter, the ignition shall be in position ON.



  • Page 91

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 91 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    SID2 3 also contains the following features:
    Dist

    Distance to destinations.
    Function can also be used as
    a trip meter

    Speed Ø

    Average speed since function last reset

    Speed W

    Speed warning (chime)

    Settings

    Settings of features such as
    alarm clock, language and
    rain sensor 3

    Phone 3

    Managing of number list, see
    Infotainment Manual.

    When the engine is started, the function that
    was selected when the engine was
    switched off is displayed, with the following
    exceptions:
    • Temp is displayed if the outside temperature is between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
    +3°C).
    • D.T.E. is displayed if less than or equal to
    30 miles (50 km).

    Outdoor temperature

    WARNING
    Remember that roads can be icy even at
    temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
    especially on bridges and stretches of
    road that are sheltered from the sun.
    The Temp function is always activated
    (even in NIGHTPANEL mode) if the outdoor
    temperature rises or falls to between 26 and
    38°F (–3 and +3°C).
    If the temperature sensor, located under the
    front bumper, is covered by snow or ice,
    temperature readings will be unreliable.

    91

    Setting values
    1 Select one of the functions using the
    steering wheel controls,
    or
    .
    • Dist (preset to 100 miles (100 km) if not
    previously set)
    • Speed Ø
    • Speed W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h)
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Use the steering wheel controls to select
    the value. (Press CLR to reset the
    value.)
    4 Press the SET button to finish setup.
    Using DIST as a trip meter
    1 Select Dist using the steering wheel
    controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the CLR button for
    approx. 1 second.
    An arrow will now appear on the right-hand
    side of the display, indicating that the trip
    meter is running.



  • Page 92

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 92 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    92

    Instruments and controls

    Resetting a single function
    1 Select the function you wish to reset
    using the steering wheel controls,
    or
    .
    • Fuel Ø (the value is rest to 10l/100 km)
    • Speed Ø
    • Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
    2 Press and hold the CLR button for
    approx. 1 second.
    The selected function will now be reset.
    Resetting the trip computer
    Press and hold the CLR button (approx.
    3 seconds) until audible confirmation is
    given.
    The following functions will be rest:
    • Fuel Ø (the value is reset to 10l/
    100 km)
    • Speed Ø
    • D.T.E. (the value is reset to the
    distance possible on the remaining fuel
    if fuel consumption is 10l/100 km, lower
    consumption means a longer possible
    distance)
    • Trip (Dist used as trip meter)

    Speed warning

    Calculating the arrival time

    This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h).
    The value can be set to between 0 and
    150 mph (0 and 250 km/h).

    (When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
    drive?)

    1 Select Speed W using the steering
    wheel controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Adjust the speed using the steering
    wheel controls.
    4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
    button.
    Go back/modify using the CLR-button.
    The word ON on the right-hand side of the
    display indicates when the speed warning
    function is active.
    An audible alarm will sound if the set speed
    is exceeded.
    Disengage the function with the CLR button.
    Re-engage the function using the SET button.

    This function should be used before starting
    out a journey.
    To calculate the arrival time, the distance
    must first be given.
    1 Select Dist using the steering wheel
    controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Set the distance to the destination using
    the steering wheel controls.
    4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
    button.
    The calculated arrival time will now appear
    on the right-hand side of the display.
    If you take a break, this time will be added to
    the previously calculated arrival time.



  • Page 93

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 93 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    You can check the distance left by selecting
    Dist. At the same time you can check the
    calculated time of arrival.
    After the distance to destination has
    decreased to zero, Dist will function as a trip
    meter (see Using DIST as a trip meter). The
    starting value for the trip meter will be the
    last distance set for the Dist function.
    Example: The Dist function is set to
    100 miles. After the count-down has
    reached 0 miles, Dist will act as a trip meter
    beginning at 100 miles.

    Calculating the arrival time if a specified
    average speed is maintained
    (When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
    drive and know what my average speed will
    be?)
    This function should be used before starting
    out a journey.
    First, set the distance under Dist.
    1 Then select Speed Ø function.
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Set the estimated average speed using
    the steering wheel controls.
    4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
    button.
    The distance and the calculated time of
    arrival is now displayed.
    The time of arrival is updated during the
    journey based on the average speed since
    Dist was set. The speed of the car must
    exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).
    By selecting Dist during the journey, you
    can see how much distance is left to travel.
    When Dist reaches zero it acts as a trip
    meter. The trip meter starts from the distance that was set previously.

    93

    NIGHTPANEL
    To improve night-driving conditions inside
    the car, the Night Panel mode can be
    selected. In this mode, the amount of information displayed is reduced, and only the
    most important instruments and displays
    will be illuminated.
    When the NIGHTPANEL button is pressed,
    only the speedometer will be illuminated.
    All other instrument lighting will be switched
    off and the needles drop to zero.
    Note: All indicator and warning lights and
    messages will operate normally if required.
    Temp (when the outside temperature falls
    or rises to between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
    +3°C)) and D.T.E. (when the remaining fuel
    is only sufficient for approx. 80 miles
    (50 km) of driving) are even shown in Night
    Panel model.



  • Page 94

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 94 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    94

    Instruments and controls

    Under Settings you can choose whether
    the entire speedometer scale (0–160 mph)
    or only part of the scale (0–90 mph) should
    be illuminated in NIGHTPANEL mode.
    1 Select Settings using the steering
    wheel controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Select Speed Scale Illum.
    4 Press the SET button.
    5 Select 0–160 mph or 0–90 mph.
    6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
    button.
    Settings
    Speed Scale Illum.
    0–160 mph
    0–90 mph

    Alarm
    1 Select Settings using the steering
    wheel controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Select Alarm Clock using the steering
    wheel controls.
    ON or OFF is displayed.
    • If OFF is shown and the alarm time is to
    be set, press SET button (do not keep
    held in) and wait for the audible signal.
    The previously time set is now shown.
    Press SET button.
    • If ON is shown and the alarm time is to
    be activated, press SET button once,
    OFF is shown in the display. Press SET
    button again to activate the function.
    4 Select alarm time using the steering
    wheel controls.
    5 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
    button.
    Go back/modify using the CLR-button.
    When the alarm sounds push one of the left
    steering wheel controls.

    Settings
    Under this heading you can select for example language and units.
    1 Select Settings using the steering
    wheel controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Select heading using the steering wheel
    controls.
    4 Press the SET button.
    5 Select using the steering wheel controls.
    6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
    button.
    Select EXIT once you have made the
    desired settings.



  • Page 95

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 95 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    The number of systems that are displayed
    on the SID depends on the car’s equipment
    level. The list shown below includes the
    systems that can be found in your car.
    Rain Sensor, page 103.

    Language.

    Unit

    ENGLISH UK

    METRIC

    ENGLISH US

    US

    FRANCAIS

    IMPERIAL

    HIGH

    DEUTSCH

    Climate System, page 114.

    MEDIUM

    ITALIANO

    Next Service: xx%.

    LOW

    ESPANOL

    INTERMEDIATE

    SVENSKA

    MAIN

    Theft Alarm, page 56.
    FULL ALARM

    Speed Scale Illum.

    DOOR ONLY

    0–160 mph

    INTERMEDIATE

    0–90 mph

    MAIN

    Park Assistance, page 180.
    ON
    OFF
    Alarm Clock, page 94.
    ON
    OFF

    Speed Scale Sel.
    BOTH SCALES
    ONLY MPH SCALE

    Time for Service.

    MAIN & INTERMED
    Reset Service Ind?
    YES NO

    95



  • Page 96

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 96 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    96

    Instruments and controls

    Explanation of the various selections under
    Settings.
    Rain Sensor

    The sensitivity has three levels.
    Park Assistance

    The Park Assistance can be shut off by
    choosing OFF.
    Alarm Clock

    Setting of alarm clock is possible.
    Language

    Select the desired language. The
    number of languages can vary
    between markets.
    Speed Scale Illum.

    Select the proportion of the speedometer to be illuminated in NIGHTPANEL mode.
    Speed Scale Sel.

    Select if both scales or just mph-scale
    shall be illuminated in NIGHTPANEL
    mode.

    Resetting the service indication

    Unit

    Select the desired group of units.
    Next Service: xx%

    Displayed percentage is approximately
    equivalent to the condition of the
    engine oil. 100% is equivalent to new
    engine oil. The type of service that is
    required is also shown here.
    Time for Service.

    :When it is time for service the required
    service type is displayed.
    INTERMEDIATE

    Reset the service indication in accordance
    with the following:
    1 Turn the remote control to the ON position, the engine must be switched off.
    2 Select Settings using the steering
    wheel controls,
    or
    .
    3 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    4 Select Time for Service.
    5 Press the SET button.
    6 To the question Reset Service Ind?
    select YES (Press CLR button to undo).

    MAIN

    Clock

    MAIN & INTERMED

    Adjustments can be made in the Infotainment system.

    A service indication must only be
    reset after the service has been
    performed.

    See separate Manual.



  • Page 97

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 97 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Headlight levelling 3

    Switches

    Cars with xenon headlights are equipped
    with an automatic headlight levelling system, which self-calibrates each time the
    vehicle is started.

    Daytime Running Lights
    The parking lights and daytime running
    lights come on automatically when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

    If a fault arises in the automatic headlight
    levelling system, the headlights will be
    angled down to avoid dazzling drivers in
    oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accordingly as the range of the headlights will be
    reduced. Check fuse 20 in the engine bay
    fuse box (see page 239).

    High beam can not be activated in this position but headlight flasher can.

    Parking lights
    The parking lights can be turned on irrespective of the position of the ignition
    switch. If the parking lights are on and the
    driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn
    them off will sound.
    Do not use the parking lights alone while
    driving.
    The parking lights may be used in combination with the front fog lights (see page 99).

    Headlights
    Low beam headlights are turned on when
    the ignition switch is turned to ON and
    turned off when the switch is turned back to
    LOCK.

    97

    Light switches

    A fault in the system will produce the following message on the Saab Information Display (SID):
    Headlight levelling
    malfunction.
    Special equipment is required for adjusting
    the basic headlight alignment.



  • Page 98

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 98 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    98

    Instruments and controls
    Courtesy Headlamp Feature
    A delay function allows the low beam headlights and back-up lights to remain on for
    about 30 seconds after the driver’s door has
    been closed.
    To activate this function:
    1 After turning off the engine, remove the
    remote control.
    2 Open the driver’s door.
    3 Pull the control stalk all the way towards
    the steering wheel.

    Dipswitch
    1 Headlight flasher
    2 High/low beam

    The low beam headlights and reversing
    lights will come on and remain on for
    30 seconds when the door is closed.

    Adjusting instrument illumination

    Instrument lighting
    High/low beam
    To switch between high and low beam, pull
    the control stalk all the way towards the
    steering wheel. (Headlight switch must be
    ON.)
    The
    symbol on the main instrument
    panel shows when the high beam is on.

    Headlight flasher
    To flash your headlights, pull the control
    stalk half-way towards the steering wheel.
    The high beam will remain on until you
    release the stalk.

    The brightness of the instrument lighting
    can be adjusted by pressing the button (+ or
    - signs on the button above the NIGHTPANEL button).



  • Page 99

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 99 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Rear fog light
    To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear
    fog light button on the instrument panel. The
    headlights or front fog lights must be on.
    The rear fog light is automatically turned off
    when the engine is switched off. When the
    car is next started, the rear fog light will have
    to be switched back on manually by pressing the rear fog light switch. If the engine is
    restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog
    light will remain on.
    Rear fog light consists of one bulb.

    Front fog light switch

    Front fog lights 3
    The front fog lights should be used in poor
    visibility.
    These are automatically turned off when the
    engine is switched off. When the car is next
    started, the fog lights will have to be
    switched back on manually by pressing the
    fog light switch. If the engine is restarted
    within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will
    remain on.
    Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions governing the use of front fog
    lights.

    Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions governing the use of rear fog light.

    Rear fog light switch

    99



  • Page 100

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 100 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    100

    Instruments and controls
    Hazard warning lights
    WARNING

    Turn signal & lane change indicators
    1 Right
    2 Left

    Turn signal & lane change
    indicators
    The stalk switch has an intermediate,
    spring-loaded position that is useful for signalling when changing lanes or passing.
    The stalk switch also has fixed positions for
    indicating a right or left turn, that are cancelled automatically when the steering
    wheel is centered.
    If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
    with which the indicators flash will be
    doubled.
    This frequency is also doubled if a trailer is
    being towed and one of its indicator bulbs
    breaks.

    Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
    has to be left at the roadside on account
    of a crash, engine trouble or a flat tire.
    If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
    they should be set up along the side of the
    road 50–110 yds. (50–100 metres)
    behind your vehicle. If the car is not
    clearly visible (e.g. over the brow of a hill
    or bridge), place the triangle/flare even
    further back.
    The button for the hazard warning lights is
    located on the climate control panel.
    When the button is pressed, all the direction
    indicators and the symbol in the button flash
    simultaneously.
    If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
    with which the indicators flash will be
    doubled.
    Hazard warning lights should only be used
    if, because of an accident or breakdown, the
    car constitutes a hazard to other road users.

    Hazard warning light switch



  • Page 101

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 101 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Priority of audible information

    Wipers and washers

    If two or more functions are active simultaneously, the most important function at that
    time will be prioritized.

    Windshield wipers

    If, for example, the direction indicators are
    active when you engage reverse, the parking assistance (if fitted) will be heard instead
    of the direction indicators. When reverse is
    disengaged, the direction indicators will be
    heard, if they are still active.

    101

    Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that
    will produce a single sweep of the wipers.
    In position 2 you can set the delay period for
    intermittent wiping using the thumbwheel on
    the stalk switch. There are 5 delay periods
    from which to choose, ranging from 2 to
    15 seconds.
    The wipers always return to their home position when the ignition is turned off.

    Back-Up
    The back-up lights come on automatically
    when reverse gear is engaged or selected
    with the ignition switched on.

    Button for accessory 3
    This button can be used for accessories,
    such as extra lights.

    To leave the wipers positioned vertically on
    the windshield, proceed as follows:
    1 Switch off the engine and remove the
    remote control.
    2 Activate the wipers within the next
    16 seconds by pressing the stalk switch
    down.
    When the ignition is next switched on the
    wipers will return to their home position.
    Changing wipers blades, see page 217.



  • Page 102

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 102 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    102

    Instruments and controls
    When the washer fluid level drops below
    1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
    equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
    to prioritize the windshield. The following
    message is displayed on the SID:
    Washer fluid level low.
    Refill.

    Headlight washers 3
    The headlights are washed at the same time
    as the windshield if the headlights are on.

    Windshield wipers
    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    OFF
    Single sweep
    Intermittent wiping
    Low speed
    High speed
    Windshield and headlight washing 3

    Control for setting wiper delay

    Washers
    Activate the washers by pulling the stalk
    switch towards the steering wheel.
    When the washers are operated, the wipers
    will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on
    how long the washers were kept on. If
    the speed of the car is less than 12 mph
    (20 km/h), the wipers will make an additional sweep after roughly 8 seconds.

    The headlights are washed every fifth time
    the windshield washers are used or if two
    (2) minutes have elapsed since the windshield was last washed.
    The headlight washers are not activated at
    speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).



  • Page 103

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 103 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Rain sensor 3

    If the stalk switch is left in the AUTO position
    when the engine is switched off, when the
    engine is next started it must first be moved
    to the 0 or 3 position and then back to AUTO
    to reactivate the sensor.

    WARNING
    Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
    ON to avoid personal injury when clearing
    snow and ice from the windshield.

    If the system malfunctions, the wipers will
    operate at low speed when the stalk switch
    is set to the AUTO position.

    NOTICE
    Turn the rain sensor off before washing
    the car in an automatic carwash, to avoid
    damaging the windshield wipers.
    When the rain sensor is activated the following symbol is displayed in SID
    .
    The rain sensor automatically controls the
    windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
    the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
    The system varies the frequency of wiping
    between single sweeps and continuous
    wiping, depending on the amount of precipitation.

    103

    Windshield wipers with rain sensor
    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    OFF
    Single sweep
    AUTO - rain sensor engaged
    Low speed
    High speed
    Windshield and headlight washing 3

    Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk
    switch to the AUTO position. The wipers
    make one sweep for reference to see how
    much water is on the windshield. In the
    future, the sensor compares the amount of
    water on the windshield with this reference
    value.



  • Page 104

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 104 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    104

    Instruments and controls

    Adjusting sensitivity
    The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
    adjusted under Settings. If you increase the
    sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep
    for reference.
    1 Select Settings using the steering
    wheel controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Select Rain Sensor.
    4 Press the SET button.
    5 Select the sensitivity.
    6 Confirm this selection by pressing the
    SET button.
    Go back/modify using the CLR-button.

    Rain Sensor
    HIGH
    MEDIUM
    LOW
    The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected
    by the amount of daylight. The sensor is
    somewhat more sensitive at night. This
    adjustment is automatic.

    Explanation of sensor sensitivity.
    HIGH

    The sensor is set to high sensitivity.
    The wipers start when there is only
    a small amount of water on
    the windshield.
    MEDIUM

    The sensor is set to normal sensitivity.
    This is one of the Default Settings.
    LOW

    The sensor is set to low sensitivity (wipers operate only with a large amount of
    water on the windshield, i.e., downpour).



  • Page 105

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 105 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Rear window wiper, SportCombi

    The washer jet is not adjustable.

    To obtain:

    Changing wiper blade, see page 217.

    • a single sweep: move the control to
    position 2, the control springs back to the
    home position.
    • intermittent wiping, 6 s: move the control
    to position 2.
    If the windshield wipers are activated then
    the rear window wiper will automatically
    changeover to intermittent wiping when
    reverse gear is engaged and the engine
    is running.
    • washing and wiping: move the control to
    position 3.
    The control returns to the home position.
    The wiper makes 3 sweeps after the
    washing has finished. If the speed of the
    car is below 40 km/h when the washing
    has finished the wiper makes an extra
    sweep after 5 s to wipe off any washer
    fluid residue.

    When the washer fluid level drops below
    1 litre, the rear window washer is deactivated. This is in order to prioritise the windshield. The following message is displayed
    on the SID:
    Washer fluid level low.
    Refill.

    Rear window wiper, SportCombi
    1 OFF
    2 Intermittent wiping
    3 Washing and wiping

    105



  • Page 106

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 106 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    106

    Instruments and controls

    Automatic climatecontrol system (ACC)
    Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
    inlet at the bottom edge of the windshield. It
    passes through an effective filter before
    reaching the climate control system and
    delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
    via openings in the parcel shelf. It is then led
    through outlets on either side of the car
    behind the rear bumper.
    The Automatic Climate-Control system
    (ACC) automatically maintains the desired
    cabin temperature, regardless of the
    weather outside.
    The system will achieve the desired temperature in the quickest possible way.
    Note that heating or cooling is not
    speeded up by setting the temperature
    higher or lower than the final temperature you desire.
    To optimize the performance of the air conditioning system, all windows and the
    moonroof 3 should be shut. The air vents in
    the fascia must be open.

    ACC panel
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7

    Temperature setting: left-hand side
    Manual setting of air distribution
    Recirculation
    AUTO (automatic regulation)
    A/C
    Defroster
    Rear window heating

    The incoming air is treated in three stages:
    first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified and cooled; and finally, if required,
    it is heated.
    The filter is a combined particle and charcoal filter. It is so efficient that levels of
    noxious substances such as benzene and
    toluene are also reduced.

    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13

    Temperature setting: right-hand side
    Seat heating, front right seat
    Manual increase of fan speed
    Hazard warning lights
    Manual decrease of fan speed
    Seat heating, front left seat

    To reduce potential misting on the insides of
    the windows, the glass should be cleaned
    with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
    will need to be done depends on how clean
    the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
    windows will need to be cleaned more
    frequently.



  • Page 107

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 107 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls

    107

    The system uses seven sensors:
    • Outside air temperature sensor
    • Cabin air temperature sensor (by the interior rearveiw mirror)
    • Sun sensor (on the facia)
    • Blended air temperature sensors 2
    (located in the front floor vents).
    • Blended air temperature sensors 2
    (located in the outer panel vents).
    Note:
    If the sun sensor is covered, the ACC
    system will not be able to regulate the cabin
    climate as intended.

    Sun- and cabin sensor, Sport Sedan and
    SportCombi
    1 Sun sensor
    2 Cabin temperature sensor

    Sun- and cabin sensor, Convertible
    1 Sun sensor
    2 Cabin temperature sensor



  • Page 108

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 108 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    108

    Instruments and controls
    Temperature control

    Panel vent

    Air vents
    The air vents swivel universally, so that air
    can be directed as desired. In winter, for
    instance, the outer vents can be directed
    onto the door windows for enhanced
    demisting.
    The amount of air can be individually controlled by the regulator on each vent. If you
    wish to reduce the airflow, start by halfshutting the vent in question.
    Certain variants have an air vent on the rear
    of the floor console.

    The cabin is divided into two temperature
    zones:
    1 Driver’s zone.
    2 Passenger zone.

    • The most usual temperature setting is
    between 64–75°F (18–24°C), depending
    on personal preference and what clothing
    is worn.
    • Change the temperature setting in 2°F
    (1°C) steps.

    The temperature in the rear seat will be a
    mixture of the two zones.

    Make sure the air vents are open when cooling the cabin in warm weather.

    The cabin temperature can be set to
    between 61–79°F (16–26°C).

    When the ignition is switched off, only the
    temperature control affects the system the
    next time the engine is started. The system
    will warm up/cool down to the temperature
    to which the control is set.

    The selected temperature is not the actual
    air temperature but corresponds to the comfort level normally experienced at that temperature after allowance has been made for
    the airflow, relative humidity, solar radiation,
    and so on, currently prevailing inside the
    car.



  • Page 109

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 109 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls

    109

    MAX heat (red indicator):

    MAX cooling (blue indicator):

    Condensation water

    MAX heating is obtained when the temperature knob is turned to the first position past
    26 (to the red LED).

    MAX cooling is obtained when the temperature knob is turned to the first position past
    16 (to the blue LED).

    The driver’s side selection controls air distribution and the recirculation status. The
    temperature can be adjusted on the passenger side.

    The driver’s side selection controls air distribution and the recirculation status. The
    temperature can be adjusted on the passenger side.

    When the A/C compressor is on, the incoming air is dehumidified. The resulting condensation water is drained away through an
    outlet under the car.

    MAX heating produces:

    MAX cooling produces:






    • Max. cooling effect (A/C compressor will
    run even if AC OFF has been selected).
    • Air distribution through panel vents.
    • Maximum fan speed.
    • Recirculation ON.

    Maximum heat.
    Air distribution to windscreen and floor.
    Recirculation OFF.
    High fan speed.

    It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
    be seen dripping from this outlet when the
    car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
    and the higher the humidity, the more condensation will form.



  • Page 110

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 110 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Functions
    Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
    If a manual function is selected, it will be locked in but other functions
    will be controlled automatically.
    The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
    Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recirculation will be controlled automatically.
    Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual
    air distribution selections.
    When the engine is started, the ACC system will be in
    AUTO mode.
    The A/C-compressor is turned off.
    The incoming air is not cooled or dehumidified. Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recirculation
    will be controlled automatically.
    Turn the fan control anticlockwise until "OFF" lights
    up.
    ACC-system OFF.
    Fan OFF.
    A/C-compressor OFF.
    Air distribution selections locked in current settings.
    Recirculation can be selected manually.
    Heating 3 of the front seats is deactivated.
    Pressing AUTO-button will put the system into automatic mode.
    Reactivation by turning the fan control clockwise one
    click causes the system to resume any manual selections.

    110

    The rear window and door mirror heating is controlled
    manually.
    Deactivate the heating as soon as the rear window is
    clear of ice and misting to avoid imposing a heavy
    load on the battery longer than necessary. Note, however, that heating will deactivate automatically after a
    set time.
    Turn the fan control to increase fan speed.
    If fan speed 0 is selected, the A/C-compressor will be
    disengaged and the indicator on the AC OFF button
    will illuminate.
    Recirculation is controlled manually to optimise cooling although it can also be switched on and off manually.
    Recirculation does not appreciably change the air
    quality but it can be useful to switch it on to prevent
    unpleasant smells from entering the cabin.



  • Page 111

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 111 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    111

    Instruments and controls

    Air distribution

    Defroster and floor vents
    One press: When the defroster is chosen manually,
    all the windows (except the rear side windows, where
    the air flow is off) are demisted by:
    • High fan speed.
    • The air is directed to the defroster vents.
    • Temperature increases somewhat.
    • Recirculation OFF.

    Floor vents

    • Activation of rear window/door mirror heating.
    The defroster function remains engaged until another
    selection is made. Heating of the rear window/door
    mirrors will, however, deactivate after a set time
    period.
    Two presses: Air is directed to the windscreen without the fan speed being increase or the rear window
    heating being switched on.
    To revert to a previous setting, press the AUTO button.

    Floor and panel vents



  • Page 112

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 112 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls

    112

    Start in cold weather:
    To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster setting, maximum heat and low fan speed.
    As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor
    vents and the fan speed will be increased.

    Panel

    As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the
    fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by
    the system.
    Start in warm weather:
    The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents
    at high fan speed and will activate the A/C compressor (unless the
    AC OFF switch has been pressed).
    If the ambient air temperature is over 77°F (25°C), the recirculation
    cuts in after 0-15 seconds, if this is required in order to reach the
    desired temperature.

    Defroster, panel and floor

    As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan
    speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.



  • Page 113

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 113 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Formation of ice and mist in
    extreme weather conditions
    It is only in the most extreme conditions that
    icing and misting of window glass are likely
    to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or
    severe cold coupled with high relative
    humidity, or when passengers are perspiring heavily or wearing wet clothes. The following measures are recommended if such
    problems should occur:
    1 Select AUTO and set the temperature to
    70°F (21°C)
    2 Push one time on the defroster button. If
    this is not enough...
    3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not
    enough...
    4 Select a higher temperature.

    Electric heating, front
    seats 3

    113

    Calibration

    Heating is thermostatically controlled.

    Calibration is performed automatically
    every 40:th time the car is started after
    having been switched off for more than
    2 hours or if the battery has been disconnected.

    The heating has two effect steps.

    Programming

    We do not recommend prolonged use of the
    higher level for people with sensitive skin.

    A number of functions can be customized
    under Settings (see page 114).

    Heating is controlled manually but can also
    be automatic. Refer to Settings on
    page 114.

    Tips

    The seat cushions and backrests of the front
    seats are heated.

    (before contacting a workshop. We recommend that you contact a Saab dealer)
    • If you feel that the ACC system is not functioning satisfactorily, select "Default
    Settings" under Settings (see page 114.



  • Page 114

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 114 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    114

    Instruments and controls

    ACC- Convertible

    Settings

    When the soft top is folded, several functions in the ACC-system is effected.

    Some of the functions of the ACC system
    can be customized.
    1 Select Settings using the steering
    wheel controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Select Climate System.
    4 Press the SET button.
    5 Select the Rear Defroster, Heated
    Seats, Fan Settings, A/C Mode or
    Default Settings.
    6 Press the SET button.
    7 Make your selection.
    8 Confirm your selection by pressing the
    SET button.

    The system adjusts itself as follows:
    • xxAUTO goes out.
    • Heating, air distribution and fan speed are
    not affected.
    • Recirculation and rear window heating
    are cut out.
    • The A/C compressor is switched off (manual activation is possible by pressing the
    AC button).
    All manual selections are possible with the
    exception of rear window heating and
    defroster function.
    When the soft top is raised, the system
    reverts to the AUTO mode and the set temperature.
    Note: When the soft top or all the windows
    are open in a hot, humid climate, turning the
    air conditioning on manually can cause condensation to form on cold surfaces, such as
    the air ducts.

    Settings
    Climate System
    Rear Defroster
    AUTO
    MANUAL
    Heated Seats
    AUTO
    MANUAL
    Fan Settings
    HIGH SPEED
    MEDIUM SPEED
    LOW SPEED
    A/C Mode
    AUTO
    OFF
    Default Settings
    Are you sure?
    YES NO



  • Page 115

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 115 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Instruments and controls
    Explanation of how the ACC system can be
    customized under Settings.
    Rear Defroster
    AUTO:
    The rear window and door mirror
    heating is controlled automatically.
    This is one of the Default Settings.
    MANUAL:
    The rear window and door mirror
    heating is switched on with
    the button on ACC panel.
    Convertible: The rear window heating
    cannot be turned on when the soft top is
    folded.

    Heated Seats
    AUTO:
    The front seat heating is controlled
    automatically.
    Select the level by repeatedly
    pressing the appropriate button on
    the ACC panel: 2 arrows on symbol
    = standard; 3 arrows = high; 1 arrow
    = low. The selected heating setting
    is saved when the engine is
    switched off. Note: The symbol on
    the ACC panel goes out if the heating is turned off automatically by the
    system.
    MANUAL:
    See Electric heating, front seats 3
    on page 113.
    This is one of the Default Settings.

    115

    Fan Settings
    HIGH SPEED:
    This selection give a slightly higher
    fan speed than MEDIUM SPEED
    though with continued automatic
    regulation.
    MEDIUM SPEED:
    Normal automatic fan speed. This is
    one of the Default Settings.
    LOW SPEED:
    This selection give a slightly lower
    fan speed than MEDIUM SPEED
    though with continued automatic
    regulation.
    Convertible: Fan speed is not regulated
    automatically when the soft top is open.



  • Page 116

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 116 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    116

    Instruments and controls

    A/C Mode
    Auto:
    Automatic engagement and disengagement of the A/C. This is one of
    the Default Settings.
    A/C off:
    A/C compressor OFF (see also
    page 110). The A/C compressor
    can be activated temporarily by
    pressing the AC or AUTO button
    while on the road and if the outside
    temperature is above 41°F (+5°C).
    The A/C will be off the next time the
    engine is started, if the engine has
    been switched off for more than
    2 hours.
    Convertible: The A/C compressor is
    switched off when the soft top is folded
    down.
    Further customizations to this function can
    be made at a workshop. We recommend
    that you contact a Saab dealer.
    • The A/C compressor can be on even
    when the soft top is folded down.
    • The A/C compressor can be set to
    operate as when the soft top was last
    folded down.

    Dual/Single Zone
    Dual zone:
    Individual temperature setting for
    each zone (see page 108). The system saves the settings when the
    engine is switched off. This is one of
    the Default Settings.
    Single zone:
    Common temperature setting when
    the engine is started. If the temperature setting for the passenger zone
    is changed, the system will switch to
    Dual zone control. Single zone control will return the next time the
    engine is started having been
    switched off for more than 2 hours.



  • Page 117

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 117 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment

    117

    Interior equipment
    Steering wheel
    adjustment __________
    Electric windows _______
    Rearview mirrors_______
    Moonroof 3 ___________
    Interior lighting ________
    Cup holder 3 __________
    Power Outlet 3 ________
    Storage compartments __
    Trunk ________________

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    118
    119
    122
    128
    131
    132
    134
    134
    136



  • Page 118

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 118 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    118

    Interior equipment

    Steering wheel
    adjustment
    WARNING
    Only adjust the steering wheel while the
    car is stationary so that you are not
    distracted from the traffic.
    The height and reach of the steering wheel
    can be adjusted.
    There is a release lever under the steering
    column.
    1 Pull down the lever to release the steering wheel.
    2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.
    3 Raise the lever to the locked position to
    lock the steering wheel in position.
    When returning the release lever to its
    locked position, you may need to adjust the
    position of the steering wheel slightly to
    allow the lock mechanism to engage correctly.
    Steering wheel lock, see page 152.

    Lever for steering wheel adjustment

    Horn signal
    Activate the horn by pressing one of the
    three areas shown above on the steering
    wheel pad.



  • Page 119

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 119 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment

    119

    Electric windows
    WARNING
    Bear in mind the pinch hazard when closing the side windows. May cause serious
    or fatal injuries!
    • Always remove the remote control
    from the ignition switch when you
    leave the car. This will prevent
    personal injury caused by the activation of the electric windows, for example, due to children playing.
    • The person operating the electric
    window is responsible for ensuring
    that no one, especially a child, has
    their head, hands or fingers in the
    window openings, before raising the
    window.
    • Do not stick any part of the body or the
    head out through an open window
    while the car is moving.
    The electric windows are operated by
    means of switches in the door armrests.
    For the electric windows to work, the remote
    control must be in the ON position in the
    ignition switch.
    At the end of a journey and having removed
    the remote control, you can still operate the
    windows, so long as neither of the front
    doors has been opened.

    Window switches
    Windows having the automatic closing function (option) can be operated as long as the
    car is unlocked and until 20 minutes has
    passed since the remote control was
    removed from the ignition switch.

    To open
    Press down the front edge of the button one
    step.

    Window switch in rear door

    Comfort opening 3
    Comfort opening is the remote opening of
    windows and the moonroof.
    Press and hold the unlocking button on the
    remote control until the windows and
    optional moonroof start to open (approx.
    2 s).

    The window will stop when it is fully open or
    when the button is released.

    During comfort opening of the windows,
    moonroof 3 and soft top (Convertible), the
    range is reduced by approximately half.

    Automatic opening: Press the button all
    the way down and release it.

    Convertible: For the remote opening 3 of
    the soft top, refer to page 64.



  • Page 120

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 120 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    120

    Interior equipment
    Pinch protection 3

    To close
    WARNING
    Take care when closing a window to
    ensure that no one gets caught.
    Raise the front edge of the button one step.
    The window will stop when it is fully closed
    or when the button is released.
    Automatic closing 3: Raise the button all
    the way and release it. If the window does
    not close automatically, refer to Calibration
    on page 121.

    On certain model variants, the front electric
    windows are equipped with pinch protection. This is activated if something gets
    trapped between the window pane and door
    frame when the window is closed. The
    window will stop and lower slightly.
    Temporary overriding the pinch protection

    WARNING
    Make sure nothing obstructs the window
    when it is closed without pinch protection.
    If dirt, ice or similar create so much resistance that the pinch protection cuts in (the
    window cannot be closed), the pinch protection can be temporarily disengaged and the
    window closed.
    1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
    2 Press and hold the
    button on the
    driver’s door while operating the window
    in question.
    3 Close the window in question.
    The pinch protection will be active the next
    time a window is operated.

    Button for temporary deactivation of rear
    door window switches and temporary
    override of window pinch protection



  • Page 121

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 121 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment
    Calibration

    Calibration is performed as follows:

    WARNING
    The pinch protection will not be engaged
    after a power break until the electric
    windows have been calibrated.
    The front electric windows should be calibrated if automatic closing does not work or
    if the battery has been disconnected. The
    pinch protection 3 will not work if the windows are not calibrated.

    1 Close the doors.
    2 The car must be running at idling speed.
    The battery charger must not be
    connected to the car’s battery during
    calibration.
    3 Open the window fully, the button must
    be kept depressed the whole time.
    4 Close the window fully, the button must
    be kept raised the whole time and for
    approx. 1 second after the window has
    closed.
    5 Open the window fully, the button must
    be kept depressed the whole time and
    for approx. 1 second after the window
    has fully opened.
    6 Close the window fully, and keep the
    button raised until the calibration is
    confirmed with a "chime".
    Repeat steps 3-6 for the windows which
    require calibration.

    121

    Deactivating the rear window
    switches
    The
    in the driver’s door deactivates the
    window switches in the rear doors.
    The illuminated switch will change color
    from green to orange (deactivated).



  • Page 122

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 122 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    122

    Interior equipment

    Rearview mirrors
    Door mirrors
    To adjust
    The door mirrors are electrically adjustable
    and heated. The controls for adjusting the
    mirrors are on the driver’s door:
    1 Select a door mirror with the upper
    button.
    2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.
    The mirror glass can also be adjusted manually by gently pressing the glass in the
    desired direction.

    1 Selection of mirror
    2 Touch pad for adjustment
    3 Reversing position 3

    Retracting a door mirror

    The mirror heating is turned on together with
    the rear window heating.
    If the car has an electrically adjustable
    driver’s seat with memory, the mirror
    settings are stored in the memory (see
    page 20).

    Manual retraction

    Reversing position 3

    The door mirrors are designed to fold back
    if knocked. The mirrors can also be
    retracted manually. This can be useful when
    parking in tight spaces, such as on the car
    deck of a ferry. Remember to return the door
    mirrors to their normal positions before
    driving off.

    On certain model variants, the passengerside mirror glass can be angled down to
    facilitate reversing. Press the
    button
    shown in the illustration. This is located
    under the touch pad. Return the mirror to its
    normal position by pressing the button
    again. The mirror will also return to its
    normal position if you drive forward approximately 22 yds. (20 meters).



  • Page 123

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 123 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment
    Interior rearview mirror with
    autodimming 3
    The system is activated when the forwardfacing sensor detects that it is dark outside
    and the rear-facing sensor detects, for
    example, if the car following has not
    dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirror
    is then darkened to prevent the strong light
    source from dazzling the driver. This darkening is stepless.
    The mirror returns to its normal state when
    the strong light source diminishes.

    Mirror position lever
    1 Normal position
    2 Antidazzle position

    The autodimming function can be turned
    OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the
    rear-view mirror.
    Note!

    Interior rearview mirror
    The interior rearview mirror is of the autodimming type and can be deflected with the
    lever on its underside. Certain variants have
    an autodimming rearview mirror.
    The lever should be in the normal position
    when you adjust the mirror.

    Towing a trailer can cause the system to
    malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
    shaded by the trailer.

    Mirror with autodimming
    1 Forward-facing sensor
    2 Autodimming ON/OFF
    3 Rear-facing sensor

    123



  • Page 124

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 124 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    124

    Interior equipment

    Interior rearview mirror with
    garage opener, autodimming
    function and compass 3

    Preparations for first-time programming
    Before programming the garage opener for
    the first time, you must delete any factory
    codes.
    Press and hold the two outer buttons until
    the indicator light begins to flash-after
    20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
    hold for longer that 30 seconds. The garage
    opener is now in the train (or learning) mode
    and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming" - step 2.

    WARNING
    Make sure that people and objects are out
    of the way of moving door or gate to
    prevent potential harm or damage.
    When programming the garage opener,
    you may be operating a garage door or
    gate operator. Therefore it is advised to
    park outside of the garage.
    Do not use the garage opener with any
    garage door opener that lacks the safety
    stop and reverse feature as required by
    federal safety standards. (This includes
    any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
    door opener which cannot detect an
    object, signaling the door to stop and
    reverse, does not meet current federal
    safety standards. Using a garage door
    opener without these features increases
    risk of serious injury or death.

    Programming

    Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
    and compass
    1–3
    4
    5
    6

    Garage opener
    LED
    Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
    Compass bearing

    Retain your original garage door opener
    (transmitter) for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also
    suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
    the programmed garage opener buttons be
    erased for security purposes, see
    page 126.

    The garage opener can record and store the
    frequencies of three different remote controls.
    The battery in the remote control should be
    fairly new for programming to work well.
    Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
    to train additional devices to a second or
    third button. Begin with "Programming" step three.
    1 Turn the ignition ON.
    2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
    (buttons one and three) - releasing only
    when the indicator light begins to flash
    (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the
    buttons for longer than 30 seconds and
    do not repeat step two to program a
    second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two buttons.
    3 Position the end of your hand-held
    transmitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away



  • Page 125

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 125 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment
    from the button you wish to program
    while keeping the indicator light in view.
    The transmitter should face the mirror
    from below or left side of the mirror.
    4 Simultaneously press and hold both the
    chosen and hand-held transmitter
    buttons. Do not release the buttons
    until step 5 has been completed.
    Note: Some gate operators and garage
    door openers may require you to replace
    this Programming Step 4 with procedures
    noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Programming" section.
    5 After the indicator light changes from a
    slow to a rapidly blinking light, release
    both the mirror and hand-held transmitter buttons.
    6 Press and hold the just-trained button
    and observe the indicator light.
    If the indicator light stays on
    constantly, programming is
    complete and your device should activate when the button is pressed and
    released.
    Note: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" - step
    three. Do not repeat step two.
    If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two
    seconds and then turns to a constant
    light continue with "Programming"
    steps 7-9 to complete the programming of
    a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).

    125

    7 At the garage door opener receiver
    (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
    the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
    usually be found where the hanging
    antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit.
    8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or
    "smart" button. (The name and color of
    the button may vary by manufacturer.)

    Gate Operator / Canadian Programming

    Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step nine.
    9 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
    hold for two seconds and release the
    programmed button. Repeat the
    "press/hold/release" sequence a
    second time, and, depending on the
    brand of the garage door opener (or
    other rolling code equipped device),
    repeat this sequence a third time to
    complete the programming process.
    The garage opener should now activate
    your rolling code equipped device.

    If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by
    using the "Programming" procedures
    (regardless of where you live), replace
    "Programming " step 4 with the following:

    Note: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" - step
    three. Do not repeat step two.

    Canadian radio-frequency laws require
    transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)
    after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the
    garage opener to pick up the signal during
    programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
    some U.S. gate operators are designed to
    "time-out" in the same manner.

    Note: If programming a garage door opener
    or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
    device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating.
    Continue to press and hold the button while
    you press and release - every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter
    until the frequency signal has successfully
    been accepted by the garage opener. (The
    indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.)
    Proceed with "Programming" step five to
    complete.



  • Page 126

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 126 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    126

    Interior equipment
    Opening a garage door

    NOTICE
    Switch off the power supply to the garage
    door or gate (or park the car beyond the
    range of the remote control) while
    programming using the "cycling" method
    to prevent damaging the electrical motor.

    To operate, simply press and release the
    programmed button. Activation will now
    occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door
    opener, gate operator, security system,
    entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
    For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
    of the device may also be used at any time.

    Reprogramming a single button
    To program a device to the garage opener
    using a button previously trained, follow
    these steps:
    1 Press and hold the desired button. DO
    NOT release the button.
    2 The indicator light will begin to flash after
    20 seconds. Without releasing the
    button, proceed with "Programming" step 3.

    Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
    and compass
    1–3
    4
    5
    6

    Garage opener
    LED
    Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
    Compass bearing

    Erasing the three buttons
    To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased
    but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined
    below), follow the step noted:
    • Press and hold the two outer buttons until
    the indicator light begins to flash-after
    20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do
    not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The
    garage opener is now in the train (or
    learning) mode and can be programmed
    at any time beginning with "Programming" - step 3.

    Autodimming
    Press button 5 briefly to switch autodimming
    on or off. When autodimming is switched on,
    a 1 is displayed briefly in the compass window. A 0 indicates that autodimming is
    switched off. See page 123 for a description
    of operation.



  • Page 127

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 127 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment
    Compass
    The compass is built into the rearview mirror. The compass bearing is displayed in the
    top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
    updated every other second. The compass
    displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
    E, etc.
    Switch the compass display on and off by
    pressing button 5 for 3 seconds, see illustration on page 126.
    Changing zones
    The earth’s magnetic field varies depending
    on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
    your car from one magnetic zone to another
    the compass setting will need to be changed
    to ensure a correct bearing.
    1 Study the illustrations to determine the
    correct zone.
    2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
    shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).
    The zone number is now also shown.
    3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
    zone number. There are 15 zones from
    which to choose. Once the correct zone
    is selected, release the button and wait
    4 seconds. The compass will now
    display the bearing.

    Compass zones in USA

    Calibration
    Calibration is performed automatically
    during travel.
    If, for any reason, a manual calibration is
    needed perform as follows:
    1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
    the compass bearing are displayed
    (approx. 9 s).
    2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
    drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
    displayed.

    Compass zones in Canada

    127



  • Page 128

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 128 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    128

    Interior equipment

    Moonroof 3
    WARNING
    Bear in mind the pinch hazard when closing the electric moonroof. Risk of serious
    or fatal injuries!
    • Always remove the remote control
    from the ignition switch when you
    leave the car. This will prevent
    personal injury caused by the activation of the electric moonroof, for example, due to children playing.
    • The person operating the electric
    moonroof is responsible for ensuring
    that no one, especially a child, has
    their head, hands or fingers in the
    opening, before closing the moonroof.
    • Do not stick any part of the body or the
    head out through an open window
    while the car is moving.
    The moonroof is operated by the control in
    the roof console. For the moonroof to work,
    the remote control must be in the ON position in the ignition switch.
    If the car is equipped with windows having
    the automatic closing function, the moonroof can be opened and closed so long as
    the car is unlocked until 20 minutes has
    passed since the remote control was
    removed from the ignition switch.

    Moonroof control
    1 Manually controlled opening
    2 Automatic opening

    To open
    Manually controlled opening
    Slide the control rearward to its first position.
    The moonroof will halt when you release the
    control. If you do not release the control, the
    moonroof will open to the comfort position.
    To open the moonroof further, release the
    control and then once again press it rearward.
    Automatic opening
    Slide the control rearward to the second
    position and release it. The moonroof will
    open to the comfort position. To open the
    moonroof further, slide the control rearward
    a second time.

    3 Manually controlled closing
    4 Automatic closing
    5 Ventilation position

    Moonroof without automatic opening
    Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see
    illustration). The moonroof will stop when
    you release the control or once it is fully
    open.



  • Page 129

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 129 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment
    To close
    WARNING
    Exercise great care when closing the
    moonroof to ensure that nothing gets
    trapped.
    Manually controlled closing
    Slide the control forward to its first position.
    The moonroof will halt when you release the
    control.
    Automatic closing 3
    Slide the control forward to its second position and release it. The moonroof will close
    fully.
    The moonroof pinch protection halts closing
    and opens the moonroof slightly if something obstructs closing.
    Moonroof without automatic closing 3
    Slide the control forward to position 3 (see
    illustration). The moonroof will stop when
    you release the control or once it is fully
    closed.

    Ventilation position (rear edge of moonroof open)
    • To open – press in the control.
    • To close – slide the control forward to the
    second position.
    It is also possible to select the ventilation
    position when the moonroof is open by
    pressing in the control. The moonroof will
    then close automatically. Press the control
    once more to open the moonroof to its ventilation position.
    If you wish to open the moonroof fully from
    the ventilation position, you must first close
    it (slide the control forward). You can then
    slide the control rearward to open the moonroof.
    The moonroof incorporates an interior,
    manual, sliding sun blind.
    Moonroof without automatic closing 3
    • To open – press the control up.
    • To close – slide the control forward to
    position 3.

    129

    Comfort opening 3
    Comfort opening is the remote opening of
    windows and the moonroof.
    Press and hold the unlocking button on the
    remote control until the windows and
    optional moonroof start to open (approx.
    2 s).
    During comfort opening of the windows,
    moonroof (option) and soft top, the range is
    reduced by approximately half.
    If the moonroof is in the ventilation position,
    it will not open.
    Convertible: For the remote opening of the
    soft top, refer to page 64.



  • Page 130

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 130 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    130

    Interior equipment

    Pinch protection 3
    WARNING
    Make sure nothing obstructs the moonroof when it is closed without pinch
    protection.
    The moonroof is equipped with pinch protection. This is activated if something gets
    trapped when the moonroof is being closed.
    The moonroof will stop and open slightly.
    Temporary overriding the pinch protection
    If dirt, ice or similar create so much resistance that the pinch protection cuts in
    (moonroof cannot be closed), the pinch protection can be temporarily disengaged.
    1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
    2 Press and hold the
    button on the
    driver’s door while operating the window
    in question.
    3 Close the moonroof with the button on
    the roof console.
    The pinch protection will be operative the
    next time the moonroof is operated.

    Button for overriding the moonroof pinch
    protection

    Emergency operation of the
    moonroof
    In an emergency, such as if there is an electrical failure, the moonroof can be operated
    with a screwdriver.
    Remove the lens from the roof console. Use
    a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot
    in the center of the motor shaft and turn the
    screwdriver.
    Turn clockwise to close the moonroof when
    in ventilation position.
    Turn counter-clockwise to close when in
    open position.



  • Page 131

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 131 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment

    131

    Rear lighting
    1 Interior lighting always off
    2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors
    3 Interior lighting on continuously

    Interior lighting
    The interior lighting consists of one front and
    one rear roof light, floor lighting, and courtesy lights in the doors (certain variants
    only). The light switch for the interior lighting
    is located on the roof console by the rearview mirror.

    1 Reading lights
    2 Roof light

    When the switch is in the mid-position (dooractivated), the interior lighting will come on:

    interior lighting will be switched off automatically after 20 minutes to save the battery.

    • When the car is unlocked.
    • When a door is opened and the ignition is
    OFF.
    • When the remote control is removed from
    the ignition switch.

    The glove box lighting is switched on and off
    automatically when the glove box is opened
    and closed.

    The lighting goes out:
    • When the car is locked.
    • When the ignition is turned on.
    • Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
    The lights are dimmed out gradually.
    If a door is left open and the light switch is in
    position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the



  • Page 132

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 132 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    132

    Interior equipment
    Trunk lighting

    Cup holder 3

    The trunk lighting is switched on and off
    when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
    If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
    switched off automatically after 20 minutes
    to prevent the battery from running flat.

    Sun visor with vanity mirror

    WARNING
    • The cup holder should not be used to
    hold cups made of china or glass as
    these can cause personal injury in the
    event of a crash.
    • Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles
    or aluminium cans.
    • Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
    drinks.

    Sun visor

    NOTICE

    Illuminated vanity mirrors are provided on
    the sun visors. The lighting comes on when
    the cover is raised.

    Take care not to spill any liquid on the
    audio system , the ignition switch or the
    like when using the cup holders. Soft
    drinks in particular can cause malfunctions.
    Cup holders are provided in the fascia, in
    the center console compartment between
    the front seats and rear seat cushion (Sport
    Sedan and SportCombi). The cup holder
    between the seats can be raised if you wish
    to use the compartment for storage.



  • Page 133

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 133 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment

    Cup holder in fascia

    Cup holder in center console compartment between front seats 3

    133

    Cup holder in rear seat cushion 3, Sport
    Sedan and SportCombi



  • Page 134

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 134 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    134

    Interior equipment

    Power Outlet 3
    You can use the electrical socket in the storage compartment under the armrest
    between the front seats to charge a mobile
    phone, for example. There is a recess on
    each side of the compartment which will
    accept a lead so that you can close the lid
    without damaging the charger lead.

    WARNING
    The maximum output of the cigarette
    lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating
    of the socket in the compartment between
    the seats is the same. Overloading can
    result in melting or even fire.

    Storage compartments
    WARNING
    The glove box must be closed while travelling. An open glove box door could
    cause personal injury in the event of a
    crash.
    There are additional storage compartments
    below the front ashtray and in the doors.

    Open the glove box with the button on the
    left of the moulding.
    Convertible has lockable glove box. Use
    the traditionally key, see page 54.



  • Page 135

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 135 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment

    Sliding cover in glove box to admit cold
    air 3.
    This allows the storage of chocolate during hot weather for example.

    135

    Card holder

    Storage compartment between front seats

    Storage pocket on front edge of seats 3

    Storage pocket on back of seats 3



  • Page 136

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 136 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    136

    Interior equipment

    Trunk
    Folding down the rear seat, Sport Sedan
    Convertible: The rear seat cannot be folded.

    WARNING
    • Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
    position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
    event of heavy braking or a crash.
    • Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
    sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
    can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
    susceptible to heat stroke.
    • Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
    • Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always
    a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing
    injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
    crash. See also page 194.

    • When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
    locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
    center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
    • When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
    locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since otherwise objects in the trunk could force their way into the cabin
    during heavy breaking or a crash.
    • Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
    a suitable height before riding in the car.



  • Page 137

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 137 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment
    For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and
    the wide part can be folded down separately.
    Next to the hinges in the trunk are handles for unlocking the rear seat
    backrests.
    The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and
    the rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.
    1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the
    trunk.
    2 Fold the backrest forward.
    Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make
    sure that it locks properly in place and that the safety belt does
    not get caught.
    If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the following message is displayed on the SID (equivalent message displayed
    for right-hand backrest):
    Rear left seat
    backrest unlocked.
    Trunk Release Handle, see page 139.
    Emergency opening of the narrow backrest, Sport Sedan, see
    page 140.

    137



  • Page 138

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 138 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    138

    Interior equipment

    Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan
    Convertible: There is no load-through hatch.

    WARNING
    • Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
    safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury resulting from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
    event of a crash.
    • Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
    handling characteristics (see page 280).
    A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
    enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
    Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
    apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
    off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
    • Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
    There is a lock on the rear side of the hatch. Use this to lock or unlock
    the hatch.
    To lock: Open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The
    hatch is now locked.
    To unlock: Fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock
    the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the trunk.



  • Page 139

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 139 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment

    139

    WARNING
    • Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place
    smaller and lighter bags on top.
    • Secure heavy and bulky items using
    the lashing eyes provided in the trunk.
    This will avert the danger of luggage
    flying around if the car should brake
    suddenly or be involved in a crash.

    Trunk Release Handle

    Tie down eyes in the trunk

    Trunk Release Handle

    Tie down eyes, Sport Sedan

    There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
    handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
    This handle will glow following exposure to
    light. Pull the release handle down to open
    the trunk from inside.

    There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
    should be used to secure loads. In general,
    loads should be placed as far forward and
    as low down as possible in the trunk.

    NOTICE
    The trunk release handle was not
    designed to be used to tie down the trunk
    lid or as an anchor point when securing
    items in the trunk. Improper use of the
    trunk release could damage it.

    • Secure small items if the backrest is
    folded down. Small items can also be
    thrown around inside the car and
    cause personal injury.
    • The elastic cargo net 3 is only
    designed for light objects that are to be
    kept in place while driving
    • Elastic cargo net 3: WARNING. Avoid
    eye injury. DO NOT overstretch.
    ALWAYS keep face and body out of
    recoil path. DO NOT use when strap
    has visible signs of wear or damage.
    • The rear seat must be in the upright
    position to protect against load
    displacement in the event of a crash.



  • Page 140

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 140 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    140

    Interior equipment

    • Do not exceed the load capacity of the
    car, as this will alter its handling characteristics (see page 280).
    • Match your speed and driving style to
    how the car is loaded. The handling
    characteristics of the car can be
    affected since a load in the trunk will
    alter the car’s center of gravity.

    Trunk lighting
    On the underside of the parcel shelf is a light
    that is switched on and off when the trunk is
    opened and closed.
    If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
    switched off automatically after 20 minutes
    to prevent the battery from running flat.

    Cover over emergency opening lever, on
    parcel shelf

    Emergency opening of the
    narrow backrest, Sport Sedan
    The narrow section of the backrest can be
    opened in an emergency if the car is without
    electricity (not possible to open trunk lid)
    and you need to access the trunk for a warning triangle, for example.
    • Remove the cover and depress the yellow
    lever forward.
    Tools and spare wheel, see page 254.



  • Page 141

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 141 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment

    141

    Folding down the rear seat backrest, SportCombi
    WARNING
    • Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
    position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
    event of heavy braking or a crash.
    • Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
    sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
    can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
    susceptible to heat stroke.
    • Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
    • When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
    locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
    center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
    • Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
    a suitable height before riding in the car.
    For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the
    wide part can be folded down separately.
    It is easiest to fold down the rear seat backrests if the front seats are
    slid forward.
    1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle forward.
    An unlocked backrest has a red indicator by the handle.
    2 Fold the backrest forward.

    When returning the backrest to its upright position, make sure that
    it locks properly in place. The red indicator by the handle must not
    be visible. Also make sure that the seatbelt does not get caught.
    If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the following message is displayed on the SID (equivalent message displayed
    for right-hand backrest):
    Rear left seat
    backrest unlocked.



  • Page 142

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 142 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    142

    Interior equipment
    WARNING

    • Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place smaller and lighter bags on
    top.
    • Elastic cargo net 3: WARNING. Avoid eye injury. DO NOT
    overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path.
    DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
    • Secure heavy and bulky items using the lashing eyes provided
    in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage flying around
    if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.
    • Secure small items if the backrest is folded down. Small items
    can also be thrown around inside the car and cause personal
    injury.
    • Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
    handling characteristics (see page 280).



  • Page 143

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 143 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment
    Load-through hatch, SportCombi
    WARNING
    • Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
    safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury resulting from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
    event of a crash.
    • Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
    handling characteristics (see page 280).
    A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
    enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
    Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
    apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
    off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
    • Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.

    143



  • Page 144

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 144 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    144

    Interior equipment

    Tie down eyes, SportCombi
    There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
    should be used to secure loads. In general,
    loads should be placed as far forward and
    as low down as possible in the trunk.
    Driving with the trunk lid open, see
    page 194.

    WARNING
    • Put heavy loads as low down and as
    far forward as possible in the luggage
    compartment, i.e. against the back of
    the rear seat.
    • Never stack cargo so high that any
    part of the cargo lies above the edge
    of the backrest, if a cargo guard 3 is
    not being used.
    • Always tie down the cargo so that it
    cannot be thrown forward during
    heavy braking or in the event of a
    crash.
    • Unsecured and heavy cargo can
    increase the risk of injury during hard
    braking, sudden avoidance manoeuvres and in the event of a crash.
    • Use the lashing eyes and suitable
    anchorage straps 3 for optimum
    securing of loads.
    • Provide protection on sharp edges to
    prevent damage to the cargo straps.



  • Page 145

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 145 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment
    • If possible, avoid having the rear seat
    folded down when driving with a heavy
    load, because the anchoring possibilities are restricted when the rear seat
    is in this position. That the rear seat
    is in the upright is a basic requirement for protection against cargo
    displacement in the event of a
    crash.
    • Improve safety by fastening the outer
    seatbelts. Check that the red "indicator-flag" next to the opening handles is
    not visible. If the red "indicator-flag" is
    visible the backrest is not locked.
    • Match your speed and driving style to
    how the car is loaded. The handling
    characteristics of the car can be
    affected since a load in the trunk will
    alter the car’s center of gravity.
    • An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg)
    corresponds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
    (1,000 kg) in a front-end collision at
    32 mph (50 km/h).
    • Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
    luggage) so that the gross vehicle
    weight and the axle weight are not
    exceeded, see page 280.

    145

    Cargo net 3
    WARNING
    • Never overload the cargo net 3. If the
    elastic breaks this may cause
    personal injury. Do not use a cargo net
    that shows signs of wear.
    • Never use the elastic floor net 3 and
    elastic side net 3 when the rear seat is
    folded down. These nets are only
    intended to keep light objects tidy, not
    for the anchoring of loads.
    • Secure the load in the luggage
    compartment firmly. Using a cargo net
    is not considered as load securing.
    • The only purpose of a cargo net is to
    prevent light objects from being
    thrown forward into the cabin during
    heavy breaking.



  • Page 146

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 146 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    146

    Interior equipment

    Cargo net, vertical 3, SportCombi
    Fit the net behind the rear seat backrest.
    1 Remove the rear cover panels in the
    roof.
    2 Fit the net’s upper fasteners into the two
    rear attachment points in the roof.
    3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two
    anchorage eyes closest to the rear seat.
    Tension the straps.
    The cargo net can also be fitted behind the
    front seats when the whole rear seat is
    folded.
    1 Remove the front cover panels in the
    roof.
    2 Snap the net’s upper fasteners into the
    two front attachment points in the roof.
    3 Lengthen the straps with the enclosed
    extra straps. Secure the hooks in the two
    outer eyes furthest back on the front
    seats’ rails down by the floor. Tension
    the straps.

    Attaching the cargo net to the roof

    Cargo net fitted in front anchorage eye

    Storing the cargo net

    Storage
    When the cargo net is not in use it should be
    stored in the bag supplied. Position the bag
    on the floor in the luggage compartment,
    closest to the backrest and secure it in the
    front anchorage eyes using the Velcro fasteners.



  • Page 147

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 147 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Interior equipment

    147

    Cargo net, floor mounted 3, SportCombi
    1 Fold up the floor. Position the edges of
    the floor in the slots in the side pieces.
    2 Fit the bag/carrier on the lower floor and
    secure the net’s hooks in the folded-up
    floor.

    Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi
    1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber
    bands are not twisted
    2 Lower anchorage point

    Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi
    with subwoofer 3
    1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber
    bands are not twisted
    2 Lower anchorage point



  • Page 148

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 148 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    148

    Interior equipment

    Cargo guard 3, SportCombi
    NOTICE
    Do not place any objects on the extended
    cargo guard. It is designed to shield
    against view and not for storage.
    To fit
    1 Hold the cartridge so that the extendible
    part faces backward.
    2 Position the cartridge over the pin (1) on
    the left and right-hand sides. Press the
    cartridge down and rotate it slightly
    forward until a click is heard.
    3 Check the fitting by pulling the cartridge
    up, it should now be fitted firmly.

    WARNING
    A cassette that is incorrectly fitted can
    detach and cause personal injury in the
    event of a collision, heavy breaking or
    similar.

    Fitting the cargo guard

    Opening the cargo guard

    1 Pin on which the cargo guard is fitted
    2 Handle for removing the cargo guard

    To remove
    1 Retract the cargo guard into the
    cartridge.
    2 Pull the handle (2) back and lift up the
    cartridge. Repeat this on the other side.

    Opening the cargo guard
    The cargo guard can be opened halfway in
    order to facilitate loading objects into the
    luggage compartment (and to avoid stretching in over the luggage compartment to
    reach the cargo guard).
    1 Open the tailgate.
    2 Press the rear lip of the cargo guard
    down, e.g. with an elbow. The cargo
    guard now opens halfway so that
    objects can be more easily loaded into
    the luggage compartment.
    3 Pull the cargo guard down to the lower
    position



  • Page 149

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 149 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    149

    Starting and driving

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    Ignition switch ________
    Steering wheel lock ____
    Starting the engine ____
    Important considerations
    for driving __________
    Refueling ____________
    Engine Break-in Period_
    Manual transmission___
    Automatic
    transmission 3 ______
    Cruise control ________
    Braking ______________
    Traction Control System
    (TCS) ______________
    Electronic Stability
    Program (ESP® ) 3 ___
    Parking brake_________
    Parking ______________
    Saab Parking
    Assistance 3________

    150
    152
    152
    154
    157
    161
    162
    163
    169
    170
    173
    175
    177
    177
    180

    Economical driving _____
    Driving in cold weather__
    Driving in hot climates __
    Towing a trailer 3 ______
    Driving with a roof rack
    load ________________
    Driving with a load _____
    Driving with the trunk lid
    open________________
    Driving in deep water ___
    Driving at night ________
    Towing the car_________
    Jump starting _________
    For long trips __________

    183
    185
    187
    188
    192
    194
    194
    194
    195
    195
    198
    200



  • Page 150

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 150 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    150

    Starting and driving

    Ignition switch
    The ignition switch is located on the center
    console between the front seats. In cars
    with automatic transmission, the remote
    control can only be removed when the
    selector lever is in position P.

    NOTICE
    Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
    crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
    liquid gets into it, the switch may not
    operate properly.
    If snow from clothing falls into the ignition
    switch and melts, the ignition switch can
    seize (freeze). Brush snow off clothing
    before getting into the car.

    WARNING
    • Always remove the remote control
    before leaving children unattended in
    the car.
    • Apply the parking brake before removing the remote control.
    • Never remove the remote control
    while the car is moving. This will activate the steering wheel lock and make
    it impossible to steer the car.
    To allow the various systems in the car time
    to register that the remote control has been
    inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn
    the remote control for roughly half a second.

    LOCK position
    The parking lights, hazard warning lights
    and interior lighting can be turned on.
    Cars with automatic transmission: Move
    the gear lever to P.
    The gear lever is locked in position. This is
    the only position in which the remote control
    can be removed.
    Cars with manual transmission: The
    remote control can be removed regardless
    of the position of the gear lever.



  • Page 151

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 151 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    151

    OFF position

    ON position

    ST - starter position

    Parts of the electrical system are operative.

    The entire electrical system is operative.
    Do not leave the remote control in the ON
    position when the engine is not running.
    Turn the remote control to the OFF position
    to disconnect the electrical system.

    The starter motor operates (automatic
    transmission: selector lever must be in P or
    N) when the remote control is turned to this
    position. When released, the remote control
    will spring back to the ON position.

    When you turn the remote control to ON,
    some indicator and warning lights will come
    on in the main instrument panel. These
    should go out after about 3 seconds.

    The car has an electronic restart lock. If the
    engine fails to start, the remote control must
    first be turned back to a position between
    OFF and LOCK before the starter motor can
    be operated again.

    Do not leave the remote control in the
    OFF position with the engine not running
    as this could cause the battery to run flat
    in a matter of hours.
    Cars with automatic transmission: The
    gear lever is not locked. See also page 164.
    If the remote control is turned from ON to
    OFF before the car is stationary then turning
    to LOCK may not be possible. In which case
    turn the remote control to the ON position
    until the ABS lamp goes out, approx. 2 s.
    Following which, turn it back to OFF.



  • Page 152

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 152 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    152

    Starting and driving

    Steering wheel lock
    The steering wheel lock is electronic. The
    lock engages when the remote control is
    removed from the ignition and unlocks when
    the remote control is inserted. A click can be
    heard when the steering wheel lock locks
    and unlocks.
    If the car is parked with one front wheel
    touching the curb, for example, you may
    need to turn the steering wheel slightly
    when you insert the remote control to allow
    the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do
    not succeed on first attempt you must
    remove the remote control before trying
    again. Turn the steering wheel and insert
    the remote control into the ignition switch.
    If the steering wheel lock does not disengage it will not be possible to turn the remote
    control in the ignition switch.
    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Pull out key, turn
    steering wheel. Restart.

    If a fault arises affecting the steering wheel
    lock, the following message will be
    displayed on the SID:

    Starting the engine
    WARNING

    Steering lock malfunc.
    Make a safe stop.
    If the steering wheel lock malfunctions while
    the remote control is in the ignition switch,
    this may prevent the removal of the remote
    control or prevent the car from being
    restarted once the engine has been
    switched off.
    If you have to leave the car, lock the car by
    pressing down the lock buttons on the
    doors. Lock the front left door from outside
    with the traditional key (see page 50). The
    car is now locked but the alarm is inactive.

    • When starting the engine:
    - Sit down in the driver’s seat.
    - Depress the clutch pedal fully (M/T). If
    the gear lever is not in the neutral position, the clutch pedal must be fully
    depressed or the car will jump
    forwards or backwards, which may
    cause a crash.
    - Never start the car from outside the
    vehicle, e.g. through a window that is
    down. This could lead to serious
    personal injury.
    • Cars with automatic transmission:
    select position P to remove the ignition
    key. The key can only be removed in
    this gear position.
    • Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
    odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
    the danger of CO – always open the
    garage doors before starting the
    engine in the garage.
    • Do not rest or sleep in the car when
    parked with the engine running. There
    is a risk of depressing the accelerator
    which could lead to engine damage.
    • There is also a danger of CO poisoning if the exhaust system is leaking.



  • Page 153

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 153 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    153

    Starting the engine

    Cars with automatic transmission

    Useful tips on starting the engine

    Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily
    before it has warmed up. Do not drive away
    before the warning and indicator lights have
    gone out.

    The selector lever must be in the P or N
    position.

    If the engine has failed to start after several
    attempts in very cold weather, proceed as
    follows:
    1 Turn the ignition switch to ON (it is
    essential that you turn the ignition to
    ON before depressing the accelerator).
    2 Press the accelerator to the floor and run
    the starter motor for 5-10 seconds. This
    will prevent the engine being flooded
    (fully depressed accelerator cuts off the
    fuel supply).
    3 Now start the engine in the normal way
    - do not touch the accelerator.

    The engine has an automatic choke and
    should be started as follows:
    Cars with manual transmission
    To start the engine the clutch pedal must
    be fully depressed.
    1 Make sure the parking brake is applied.
    2 Depress the clutch pedal but do not
    touch the accelerator.
    3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
    spring back as soon as the engine has
    started and is running smoothly.
    Allow the engine to idle for about
    10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
    least 3 minutes after starting.

    1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
    position.
    2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
    Note! Once the engine has started, the
    brake pedal will sink. This is perfectly
    normal.
    3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
    spring back as soon as the engine has
    started and is running smoothly.
    Allow the engine to idle for about
    10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
    least 3 minutes after starting.

    If the engine stalls immediately after starting
    (e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
    do not touch the accelerator when restarting
    the engine.



  • Page 154

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 154 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    154

    Starting and driving

    Important
    considerations for
    driving
    1 Starting and driving
    • Do not use full throttle until the engine
    is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary
    wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge
    repeatedly enters the red zone, the
    engine may suddenly lose power, due
    to the initiation of a monitoring system
    that limits the boost pressure. We
    recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer as soon as possible.
    • Under certain barometric conditions
    (high outside temperature and/or high
    altitude) the needle may enter the first
    part of the red zone without necessarily
    indicating that a fault has arisen.
    • A protective function (interruption of the
    fuel supply) limits the engine speed.

    2 Stopping the engine
    • Do not rev the engine immediately
    before switching it off - stop the engine
    when it is idling.
    3 Regulating the boost pressure
    • One of the advantages of boost pressure regulation is that the engine can
    also be run safely on gasoline with a
    lower octane rating, although not lower
    than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
    optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
    • The maximum boost pressure is regulated according to the tendency of the
    engine to knock. Short-lived knocking
    is perfectly normal. This can occur
    when the engine is running at about
    3,000 rpm under a heavy load. The
    extent of this knocking will depend on
    the grade of fuel in the tank.
    • Isolated instances of knocking can
    occur with low-octane fuel. This
    controlled form of knocking, followed
    by a reduction in the boost pressure, is
    a sign that the control system is working normally, and is perfectly safe for
    the engine.

    NOTICE
    • If the engine sounds strange there is a
    malfunction. We recommend that you
    contact a Saab dealer immediately.
    • The use of fuel with too low an octane
    rating can cause serious engine
    damage.

    Limited performance.

    The light 3 comes on in the event of an
    engine or gearbox fault (cars with automatic
    gearbox), which can cause drivability problems. The car can still be driven but perhaps
    with limited performance.
    Contact a workshop when you find it suitably. We recommend that you contact an
    authorised Saab workshop.



  • Page 155

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 155 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    Limp-home
    The engine management system has a
    diagnostic feature that checks a number of
    internal functions. If a fault is detected in the
    throttle valve, the engine management
    system will set the throttle system to the
    limp-home mode. This means:
    • idling control will be poor (uneven idling
    since regulated by ignition and fuel
    supply)
    • engine performance will be reduced
    • the cruise control will not function
    • the capacity of the A/C compressor will be
    limited.
    If the diagnosis function detects a fault in the
    engine management system, the
    light
    "Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)" in
    the instrument panel will come on (see
    page 83). Have the car checked at a workshop as soon as possible. We recommend
    that you contact a Saab dealer.

    NOTICE
    If
    "Engine malfunction (CHECK
    ENGINE)" warning light starts to flash
    (indicating that the engine is misfiring and
    the catalytic converter can be damaged),
    ease off the accelerator slightly. The light
    should go out or start to shine constantly.
    If the light continues to flash despite
    easing off the accelerator, you may
    continue to drive the car but at the minimum throttle permitted by the current traffic situation. Have the car checked as
    soon as possible. We recommend that
    you contact a Saab dealer.

    155

    Important considerations with
    catalytic converters
    The catalytic converter is an emission control device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
    system. It consists of a metal canister with a
    honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
    walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious
    metal alloy).

    NOTICE
    Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded
    gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
    oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
    the function of the catalytic converter.
    To ensure that the catalytic converter continues to function properly, and also to avoid
    damage to the converter and its associated
    components, the following points must be
    observed:



  • Page 156

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 156 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    156

    Starting and driving

    • Have the car serviced regularly in accordance with the service program.
    • Always be alert to any misfiring of the
    engine (not running on all cylinders) and
    any loss of power or performance. At the
    first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
    and take the car to a workshop. We
    recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer.
    • If the engine fails to start (in severe cold
    or if the battery is flat), the car can be
    bump started (manual transmission only)
    or started using jump leads to a donor
    battery. However, as soon as you have
    started the engine, it is important that it
    runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
    it to idle for up to 5 minutes to give it time
    to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
    time, the engine still fails to run properly,
    switch off the engine to avoid serious
    damage to the catalytic converter. We
    recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer for advice.

    • Never park the car on dry grass or other
    combustible material. The catalytic
    converter gets very hot and could therefore start a fire.
    • Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
    • If you bump start the car when the engine
    is already at normal working temperature,
    the engine must start to run on all cylinders. Abort bump starting if the engine
    fails to start immediately.
    Failure to strictly follow these instructions
    can result in damage to the catalytic converter and associated components, and
    could represent a breach of the warranty
    conditions.

    Engine management system with catalytic
    converter
    1 Engine control module
    2 Oxygen sensor
    3 Catalytic converter

    NOTICE
    If the car runs out of gas, air may be drawn
    in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
    the catalytic converter to be damaged by
    overheating.

    WARNING
    If the engine is being run with the car on a
    rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure
    adequate cooling, air must be blown into
    the engine compartment and under the
    car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air
    effect that would obtain at the corresponding road speed.



  • Page 157

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 157 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    157

    Refueling
    WARNING
    If you spill fuel and then something ignites
    it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
    spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
    too quickly. This spray can happen if your
    tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
    weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
    wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then
    unscrew the cap all the way.
    Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
    Therefore:
    • never smoke while refueling.
    • never use gasoline for any purpose
    other than as engine fuel.
    • gasoline is extremely flammable and
    can cause severe burns. No open or
    exposed flames near gasoline.
    • do not use a mobile phone at the
    same time as refueling.
    If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
    not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
    fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area
    immediately.

    NOTICE

    NOTICE

    • Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
    right up the filler pipe as room for
    expansion is needed for when the
    temperature rises.

    The engine control module (ECM) monitoring the engine parameters also stores
    fault codes.

    • The use of fuel with too low an octane
    rating can cause serious engine
    damage.
    • Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
    soon as possible.

    Under certain circumstances, this may
    cause constant illumination of the Engine
    malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) lamp
    , thus indicating a fault that must be
    checked by your Saab dealer, see
    page 83.
    NOTE: always observe the following two
    measures:
    • Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
    screwed on correctly before the
    engine is started. Screw on the fuel
    filler cap until you hear a distinct click.
    • Avoid driving with the fuel low level
    indicator illuminated. The symbol illuminates when less than approximately
    2.5 gallons (10 litres) of fuel remains
    in the tank.



  • Page 158

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 158 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    158

    Starting and driving

    Refueling
    NOTICE
    WARNING
    If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
    not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
    fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area
    immediately.
    1 Switch off the engine.
    2 Open the filler cap, located in the righthand rear fender.
    3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the
    flange on the filler pipe and let the first
    mark (a ring, a pimple or the first springcoil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw
    the nozzle while filling is in progress.
    4 Cease refueling the first time the pump
    stops, and wait a few seconds after
    you´ve finished pumping before you
    remove the nozzle.

    Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
    up the filler pipe as expansion room is
    needed when the temperature rises.
    • Fill to maximum filling capacity.
    • Stop filling after the first time that the
    nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
    • Filling capacity can differ between
    different fuel stations and outside
    temperature. Fuel tank volume when
    nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
    0.5 gal. (2 liters).
    • Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
    pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
    room for expansion especially during
    hot weather.

    Filler cap
    Filler cap
    To remove the filler cap, turn it slowly to the
    left (counterclockwise). The filler cap has a
    spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon,
    it will spring back to the right.
    When you put the filler cap back on, turn it
    to the right (clockwise) until you hear three
    clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.
    The most effective way to prevent condensation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
    possible running problems) is to keep the
    tank full.
    Refer to page 185 for information regarding
    gasoline anti-freeze.



  • Page 159

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 159 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    Filling a portable fuel container
    WARNING
    Never fill a portable fuel container while it
    is in your vehicle. Static electricity
    discharge from the container can ignite
    the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
    burned and your vehicle damaged if this
    occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
    others:

    When refueling, hang the filler cap inside
    the fuel door

    The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder
    slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white
    ring on the cap into the slot.
    Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
    to get the right type. Your dealer can get one
    for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
    fit properly.

    • Dispense gasoline only into approved
    containers.
    • Do not fill a container while it is inside
    a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
    bed or on any surface other than the
    ground.
    • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
    inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be
    maintained until the filling is complete.
    • Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

    159

    Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
    Fuel
    Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your
    vehicle.
    For optimum performance Saab recommends:
    • Gasoline engines – AON 90.
    Gasoline Octane
    Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
    posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane
    is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
    a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
    soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
    damage your engine. A little pinging noise
    when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a
    problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel
    is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or
    higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.



  • Page 160

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 160 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    160

    Starting and driving

    Gasoline Specifications

    California Fuel

    Additives

    It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by automobile manufacturers around the world and
    contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter
    which is available from the Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
    improved driveability and emission control
    system performance compared to other
    gasoline.

    If your vehicle is certified to meet California
    Emission Standards (see the underhood
    emission control label), it is designed to
    operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
    adopting California emissions standards,
    your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
    fuels meeting federal specifications, but
    emission control system performance may
    be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
    may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
    smog-check test. See Engine malfunction
    (CHECK ENGINE) on page 83. If this
    occurs, return to your authorized Saab
    dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
    the condition is caused by the type of fuel
    used, repairs may not be covered by your
    warranty.

    To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
    United States are now required to contain
    additives that will help prevent engine and
    fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
    your emission control system to work properly. You should not have to add anything to
    your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
    only the minimum amount of additive
    required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. Saab recommends that you buy gasolines that are
    advertised to help keep fuel injectors and
    intake valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
    valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
    Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
    ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. Saab recommends that
    you use these gasolines, particularly if they
    comply with the specifications described
    earlier.
    Notice: Your vehicle was not designed
    for fuel that contains methanol. Do not
    use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and
    also damage the plastic and rubber
    parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty.
    Some gasolines that are not reformulated
    for low emissions may contain an octaneenhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask
    the attendant where you buy gasoline



  • Page 161

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 161 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    161

    whether the fuel contains MMT. Saab does
    not recommend the use of such gasolines.

    Engine Break-in Period

    Wearing in new brake pads

    Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
    spark plugs and the performance of the
    emission control system may be affected.
    The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
    If this occurs, return to your authorized Saab
    dealer for service.

    Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need
    time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant
    surfaces.

    New brake pads take time to bed in, about
    90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
    under stop-and-go conditions or about
    300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.

    Fuels in Foreign Countries
    If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the
    proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use
    leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
    repairs caused by use of improper fuel
    would not be covered by your warranty.
    To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
    club, or contact a major oil company that
    does business in the country where you will
    be driving.

    If a new engine is driven too hard, this gradual process of bedding-in will not be possible and the life of the engine will be shortened.
    During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
    do not exceed 5,000 rpm.
    In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
    throttle, other than for brief instances,
    during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).

    To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
    hard braking as much as possible.



  • Page 162

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 162 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    162

    Starting and driving

    Manual transmission
    Clutch interlock
    To start the car, the clutch pedal must be
    depressed.
    When changing gear, fully depress the
    clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It
    is inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
    on the gear lever, as this can increase the
    wear on the gearbox.
    Before reverse (R) can be engaged, you
    must lift the ring underneath the gear knob.

    NOTICE
    When reverse gear is to be engaged,
    the car must be at a standstill with
    the accelerator fully released.

    Gear positions, 5-speed

    Gear positions, 6-speed



  • Page 163

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 163 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    163

    Automatic
    transmission 3
    WARNING
    • Depress the brake pedal when shifting
    the selector lever from P or N.
    • The car must be at a standstill before
    P, R or N is selected. You have to have
    your foot on the brake pedal to move
    the lever out of P. If the car is still
    moving when a drive position is subsequently selected, this could cause a
    crash or damage the automatic transmission.
    • Never park the car with the selector
    lever in a drive position, even if the
    parking brake is on.
    • If you want to leave the car with the
    engine running, move the selector
    lever to P or N and apply the parking
    brake.
    The automatic transmission has an electronic control module. The control module
    receives information including accelerator
    position and road speed. Using this and
    other information, it controls the hydraulic
    pressure of the transmission to ensure that
    gear changing is as smooth as possible.

    Indication of gear position on main
    instrument panel

    The engine can only be started when the
    selector lever is in the P or N position.

    Selector lever
    1 Position for manual gear selection

    The remote control can only be removed
    when the selector lever is in the P position.

    When the car is stationary, the engine must
    be idling when you move the selector lever
    from one position to another. If not, the
    transmission could be damaged.

    NOTICE
    After selecting a drive position, pause
    briefly to allow the gear to engage (the car
    starts to pull a little) before you accelerate.



  • Page 164

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 164 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    164

    Starting and driving

    Selector lever detent

    Park Brake Shift Lock

    Adaptive gear change patterns

    Thermal transmission protection

    The adaptive gear change pattern function
    adapts gear changing to the prevailing driving conditions. The transmission control
    module senses the engine load, vehicle
    speed and temperature of the transmission.
    A suitable gear change pattern is then
    selected automatically to avoid unnecessary gear changes and undesired increases
    in transmission temperature.

    The transmission has built-in protection
    against overheating. If the temperature of
    the transmission fluid exceeds 302°F
    (150°C), engine torque will be limited to
    147 ft.lbs. (200 Nm).

    Certain variants use a special change pattern for the first few minutes after a cold start
    so that the catalytic converter reaches its
    working temperature more quickly.

    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Gearbox too hot. Make a
    safe stop. Open hood.
    If this message appears, stop the car as
    soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
    engine to idle until the message has gone
    out. The selector lever should be in
    position P.

    The transmission has a security function
    known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
    the gear selector lever out of the P or N position, the gear selector lever detent (catch)
    must be pressed in at the same time as the
    brake pedal is held depressed.

    Lock-up

    The detent button on the selector lever has
    to be pressed in before the lever can be
    moved between certain positions.

    Kick-down

    Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
    Lock, see page 166.

    The transmission’s torque converter has a
    lock-up function. This can lock the torque
    converter, thus reducing the engine speed
    and fuel consumption.

    When the accelerator is pressed down fully,
    a down change is made to optimize acceleration, e.g. for overtaking.
    Following this, the next higher gear will be
    selected at the optimum engine speed,
    unless you ease off the accelerator before
    reaching this.



  • Page 165

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 165 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    Driving in hilly country with a
    heavy load
    The transmission fluid can overheat when
    the gearbox is strained, for example, when
    driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
    the transmission fluid overheating, always
    drive with the selector lever in the D position. The adaptive gear change patterns are
    then active.
    High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
    can also cause the transmission fluid to
    overheat. Overheating reduces the service
    life of the fluid.

    WARNING
    Remember to use the braking effect of the
    engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you
    are descending long or steep hills to
    spare the brakes.
    Overheating can cause the brakes to
    fade!

    Towing
    Towing of cars with automatic transmission,
    see page 195.

    Descending hills
    If the speed of the car increases while
    descending a steep hill, despite the accelerator being released, the control module will
    change down. If you desire more powerful
    engine braking, manually select a lower
    gear (see page 168).

    165

    Limp-home
    NOTICE
    Do not tow a trailer if limp-home mode is
    engaged.
    If the transmission malfunctions, the control
    module will activate limp-home mode. Drivability will be affected to varying degrees.
    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Gearbox malfunction.
    Limited performance.



  • Page 166

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 166 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    166

    Starting and driving

    Cars with 5-speed transmission
    In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are
    available. Select 2nd gear when driving at
    low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.
    2nd gear must be selected manually. Select
    5th gear manually or move the selector
    lever to D, see page 168.
    Cars with 6-speed transmission 3
    • The car may be totally powerless. If this is
    case, have the car transported to a workshop to have the problem rectified.
    • The car may feel weak but can be driven
    carefully to a workshop to have the problem rectified.
    • Drivability may barely be affected.
    Irrespective of the drivability of the car, the
    car must be taken to a workshop to have the
    problem checked and rectified.

    Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
    Lock

    NOTICE
    Due to electrical problems it may not be
    possible to move the selector lever out of
    the park position, even if the ignition is
    ON. If for some reason the selector lever
    has to be moved out of the park position
    (i.e. to tow the car a short distance) do as
    described below.
    1 Apply the parking brake.
    2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage
    compartment ahead of the selector
    lever.
    3 Under the floor of the storage compartment is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin
    tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and
    hold the plastic lever while moving the
    selector lever from P to N.
    4 Remove the tool.
    5 Release the parking brake if the car is to
    be moved immediately, otherwise it
    should remain on.
    Check fuse 6 in the engine bay fuse box.
    If the fuse is OK the battery may be dead.
    Contact a workshop to have the problem
    checked and rectified. We recommend that
    you contact a Saab dealer.

    Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
    Lock



  • Page 167

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 167 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    Selector lever positions
    P
    The selector lever is locked and the transmission
    is mechanically blocked.
    The engine can be started.
    To move the selector lever out of the P position,
    depress the brake pedal and press in the detent
    (catch) on the selector lever.
    Only select the park position (P) when the car is
    stationary.
    R
    Only select the reverse position (R) when the car
    stationary. The detent release button must be
    pressed before the selector lever can be moved
    to R.
    Wait until reverse gear has engaged before
    touching the accelerator.

    167

    N
    You must press the brake pedal to move
    the selector lever from the neutral position (N).
    In neutral, the transmission is disengaged from the
    engine. The engine can be started but make sure
    the parking brake is on to prevent unexpected
    movement.
    To prevent the engine and transmission becoming
    hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with
    the engine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.
    At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive
    position (D).
    D
    The drive position (D) is the normal one for forward
    driving. The transmission shifts automatically
    between all gears from 1st to 5th or 6th, the timing
    of which depends on factors such as the current
    accelerator position and the speed of the car.
    Pause for a moment before applying the accelerator, to allow the gears to engage.



  • Page 168

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 168 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    168

    Starting and driving
    Sentronic, manual gear selection
    Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)
    (to the left position D) to select gear manually.
    Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever
    forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The
    selector lever will return to a position adjacent to
    the letter M after each gear change.
    An example of when you may wish to make
    manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
    enable you to remain in a low gear for an extended
    period of time.
    If the road surface is slippery, you may wish to start
    off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheel spin.
    When descending steep hills you should select a
    low gear to increase the braking effect of the
    engine and thus spare the brakes.

    Manual gear selections are displayed on the main instrument
    panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.
    When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the D
    position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in accelerator position. The accelerator has a different feel.
    When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the
    transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low
    enough to avoid overrevving.

    Steering wheel controls for manual gear
    selection 3

    Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear
    selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually
    using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The steering wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in the M
    position.
    Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower
    gear by pressing the left-hand button.



  • Page 169

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 169 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    Cruise control

    To set the desired speed
    1 Slide the switch to ON.
    2 Move the thumbwheel up to SET/+ or
    SET/– when the car has reached the
    desired speed (above 15 mph (25 km/
    h)).

    (Cruise control system)

    WARNING
    Do not use the cruise control system in
    wet or icy conditions, in dense traffic or on
    winding roads.
    For safety reasons (brake system function), the brakes must be applied once
    when the engine has started, before the
    cruise control system can be activated.

    To increase the preset speed
    You can increase the speed in any of
    the following ways:

    Cruise control switches

    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Tap brakes lightly
    before using cruise ctrl.

    169

    The system has the following functions:
    1 ON: engaged
    2 OFF: disengaged
    3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases
    the set speed
    4 SET/ –: sets the speed and decreases
    the set speed
    5 RESUME: re-engages the system at the
    set speed
    The CRUISE indicator light in the main
    instrument panel comes on when the switch
    is slid to ON. If you switch off the engine
    while the cruise control is ON, the system
    will be ON the next time the engine is
    started.

    • Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the
    control to SET/+ or SET/–.
    • Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the
    speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise
    control already engaged).
    • Hold the control in the SET/+ position until
    the desired speed is reached (when
    cruise control already engaged).



  • Page 170

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 170 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    170

    Starting and driving

    To reduce the preset speed

    To re-engage the system

    You can reduce speed in any of the following ways:

    Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will
    return to the previously set speed. Vehicle
    speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).

    • Brake to the desired speed. Jog the
    control to SET/+ or SET/–.
    • Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the
    speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
    • Hold the control in the SET/– position until
    the desired speed is reached.

    Temporary increase in speed
    Accelerate, without shifting down (manual
    transmission), to exceed the set speed such
    as for overtaking. When you release the
    accelerator, the car will return to the set
    speed.

    To disengage the system
    temporarily
    Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but
    only as far as to disengage the cruise control. Allow the switch to spring back.

    To disengage the system
    The system will be disengaged:
    • As soon as the brake or clutch pedal is
    depressed (cars with manual transmission).
    • When the switch is slid towards OFF. See
    also heading "To disengage the system
    temporarily".
    • When the switch is slid to OFF.
    • When the TCS/ESP® system is operative.
    • When position N is selected (cars with
    automatic transmission).

    Braking
    It is good practice to try your brakes periodically while driving. This is particularly
    important when driving in heavy rain, on
    roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or
    in salty slush. In such conditions a slight
    delay in the braking effect may be noticed.
    To minimize this delay, dry the brakes by
    applying them lightly now and again. This
    should also be done after the car has been
    washed, and in extremely damp weather.
    To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
    such as when negotiating long descents
    with a drop of several hundred yards (hundred metres), select a low gear to utilize the
    braking effect of the engine. If the car has
    automatic transmission, select 1st or 2nd
    gear.
    You can help to prolong the life of the brakes
    by thinking ahead and braking harder over
    short periods, rather than braking more
    moderately over long stretches.



  • Page 171

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 171 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    ABS brakes
    WARNING
    • It is prudent to try your brakes from
    time to time, especially when driving in
    heavy rain, through water collected on
    the road, in snow, on a wet road
    surface or in salty slush. In such conditions, the brakes may take longer than
    normal to take effect. To rectify this,
    touch the brake pedal periodically to
    dry the brakes out.
    • The same applies after the car has
    been washed or when the weather is
    very humid.
    • Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
    Before parking, and if the traffic conditions allow, brake quite heavily so that
    the brake discs and pads warm up and
    dry.
    • The brakes are power assisted and it
    should be kept in mind that the servo
    unit only provides the power assistance when the engine is running.
    • The brake pressure required when the
    engine is off, (e.g. when the car is
    being towed) is roughly four times the
    normal pedal force required. The
    pedal also feels hard and unresponsive.
    • Overheating can cause the brakes to
    fade!

    WARNING
    • The additional safety afforded by the
    ABS system is not designed to allow
    drivers to drive faster but to make
    normal driving safer.
    • To stop as quickly as possible, without
    loss of directional stability, whether
    the road surface is dry, wet or slippery,
    press the brake pedal down hard
    without letting up (do not pump the
    pedal), declutching simultaneously, and steer the car to safety.
    The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modulates the brake pressure to each wheel. The
    pressure is automatically reduced just
    before the wheel locks up and then
    increases again to the point at which the
    wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sensors send information to the brake system’s
    electronic control module for every 4 or so
    inches (decimetre) that the car rolls. This
    information is processed continuously to
    ensure that the adjustment of the brake
    pressure will be as exact as possible.
    Adjustment takes place up to 12 times per
    second.

    171

    The brake system provides Electronic
    Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distributes the brake pressure between the front
    and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve
    optimum braking performance irrespective
    of the car’s speed or load.
    The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function
    which will switch on the ABS warning light
    if a fault is detected in the system (see
    page 82).
    The following message will appear on the
    SID (and corresponding symbol on main
    instrument unit) if a fault is detected:
    Antilock brake malfunc.
    Contact service.



  • Page 172

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 172 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    172

    Starting and driving

    The ABS system will not reduce the braking
    distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,
    because the wheels cannot lock up, steering control is retained.
    When the ABS system operates you will feel
    the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking
    noise, both of which are perfectly normal.
    Apply the brake pedal with full force (you
    cannot press too hard), declutch and if necessary steer to safety.
    Do not release the brake pedal before the
    car has come to a halt or the danger is
    past!
    The above is critical.
    If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
    operate even when only light pressure is
    applied to the brake pedal. This means that
    the driver can brake gently to test the condition of the road and adapt their driving
    accordingly.
    It is well worth practising the use of ABS
    brakes on a skid pan or other suitable
    facility.

    Braking with ABS brakes.
    Indication that the system is operating:
    pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise

    Braking with ABS – evasive steering



  • Page 173

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 173 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    Traction Control
    System (TCS)
    Anti-spin system

    WARNING
    When driving normally, the TCS system
    helps to improve the car’s directional
    stability. The TCS must not be regarded
    as a system to enable the driver to maintain higher speeds. The same precautions must be adopted as normal for safe
    cornering and driving on slippery roads.

    How the system works
    The Traction Control System (TCS) is
    designed to prevent wheelspin. This
    enables the car to achieve the best possible
    grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
    together with greater stability.

    The TCS uses information from the ABS
    wheel sensors to detect when the front (driving) wheels are rotating faster then the rear
    wheels.
    If the two front wheels are rotating faster
    than the rear wheels, the torque from the
    engine is reduced to eliminate the difference.
    The process continues until all the wheels
    are rotating at the same speed.
    The advantages of the TCS become most
    apparent when the cohesion between the
    front wheels and the road surface is so low
    that one or both of the wheels would lose
    their grip were the car not equipped with the
    TCS, e.g.:
    • When the car is pulling away or accelerating with the front wheels on different
    surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),
    the TCS functions like an electronic differential lock, making sure that both wheels
    rotate at the same speed. The system
    also functions when the car is reversing.
    • When cornering, if the inside front wheel
    rotates faster than the other wheels.

    173

    TCS OFF
    lights up if:
    • a fault has been detected and the system
    has therefore been switched off
    • there is a fault in the ABS system
    • the system has been switched off
    manually.



  • Page 174

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 174 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    174

    Starting and driving
    Turning the TCS off
    The TCS is switched on automatically when
    the engine is started.
    You can switch the system off manually with
    the TCS button

    , whereupon the

    light will come on. The TCS cannot be
    switched off if the car is travelling faster than
    35 mph (60 km/h).
    It may be necessary to switch off the system
    if the car has become bogged down, for
    instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.

    TCS button

    TCS indicator
    When the remote control is turned to the ON
    position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
    while the system performs self-diagnosis.
    The
    light comes on when the TCS is
    operative, that is when one of the wheels
    has lost its grip.
    The fact that the TCS is operative indicates
    that the limit for grip has been exceeded and
    that the driver must exercise greater care.

    If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will
    be switched off automatically.
    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Traction control failure.
    Contact service.
    The cruise control system (if active) will
    automatically be disengaged if the TCS is
    operative.



  • Page 175

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 175 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    How the ESP® system works

    Electronic Stability
    Program (ESP® ) 3

    The Electronic Stability Program can help to
    prevent the car from skidding by braking
    one or several wheels independently of the
    driver. The engine output is then also
    reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
    spinning. The car has sensors that measure
    wheel speed, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,
    steering wheel position and braking pressure. The values provided by these sensors
    are used to calculate the actual direction of
    the car, the intentions of the driver and
    whether the ESP® should be engaged.

    Anti-skid system

    WARNING
    When driving normally, the ESP® system
    helps to improve the car’s directional
    stability. The ESP® must not be regarded
    as a system to enable the driver to maintain higher speeds. The same precautions must be adopted as normal for safe
    cornering and driving on slippery roads
    must be adopted.
    The Electronic Stability Program employs
    both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
    the traction control system (TCS). It is a
    system that helps the driver to stabilize the
    car in unusual circumstances that can otherwise be more difficult to handle.

    175

    Illustration of how the system applies the
    brakes on one or several wheels in order
    to reduce the likelihood of the car skidding

    If this direction does not agree with that
    intended by the driver, calculated from the
    steering wheel position, the ESP® is
    engaged.
    The ESP® improves the driver’s chances
    of retaining control over the car in a critical
    situation.



  • Page 176

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 176 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    176

    Starting and driving
    ESP® indicator light
    When the remote control is turned to the ON
    position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
    while the system performs self-diagnosis.
    The
    light comes on for a short period of
    time when the ESP® system is operative.
    Operation of the ESP® indicates reduced
    cohesion between the tires and the road,
    and that extra care should be taken by the
    driver during continued driving.

    ESP®

    button

    Turning ESP® system off
    The system can be turned off manually with

    ESP® OFF
    lights up if:
    • a fault has been detected and the system
    has therefore been switched off
    • the system has been switched off
    manually

    the ESP® button

    , whereupon the

    light will come on. The car must be travelling slower than 35 mph (60 km/h). The
    TCS is also disengaged.
    The ESP® is always engaged during braking, even if it has been switched off manually with the ESP® button.

    If a fault is detected in the system, the
    following message will be displayed on
    the SID:
    Stability control failure.
    Contact service.
    The cruise control system (if active) will
    automatically be disengaged if the ESP® is
    operative.

    NOTICE
    Changes to the chassis, such as a
    change of wheels, shock absorbers or
    springs, could affect the function of the
    ESP® system.
    Always consult a workshop before changing any chassis components. We recommend that you contact a Saab dealer.



  • Page 177

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 177 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    Parking brake

    Parking

    WARNING

    WARNING

    • Always apply the parking brake when
    you park the car. If the car is to be
    left parked for a long time, refer to
    page 179.
    • Always apply the parking brake
    before removing the remote control.
    • Do not use the parking brake while
    driving.
    • Grasp the parking brake lever in such
    a way that no fingers get trapped when
    you release the parking brake.
    The parking brake lever is situated between
    the front seats. The brake acts on the rear
    wheels. When the parking brake is applied,
    the
    indicator light on the main instrument panel will come on.
    To release the parking brake, lift the lever
    slightly, pull the release button on the underside of the lever and lower the lever.
    If conditions allow, it is best if the brake
    pedal is not depressed, or only depressed
    as little as necessary so as to stop the car
    from rolling, when the parking brake is
    applied.
    To facilitate releasing the parking brake,
    depress the brake pedal. This is especially
    appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.

    177

    Correct hold
    If the parking brake is applied when the car
    starts off, the following message will appear
    on the SID:
    Release park brake.

    • Never leave children or pets unattended in the car. In warm, sunny
    weather, the temperature inside the
    car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
    • Park where the vehicle will not create
    an obstruction or a hazard to other
    road users.
    • Do not park on dry grass or other
    combustible material. The catalytic
    converter gets very hot and could start
    a fire.
    • Apply the parking brake, remove the
    remote control and lock the car.



  • Page 178

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 178 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    178

    Starting and driving

    NOTICE
    Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
    • Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
    computer or similar object visible in
    the car.
    • Clothing, packages and bags attract
    thieves.
    • Do not leave small objects such as
    CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
    • If possible, park in a well-lit, conspicuous parking space.
    • Thieves strike whenever and wherever they are given the opportunity.

    Parking on a hill
    When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
    wheels so that they will be blocked by the
    curb if the car should move.
    If the car is parked with one front wheel
    touching the curb, for example, you may
    need to turn the steering wheel slightly
    when you insert the remote control to allow
    the steering wheel lock to unlock.

    1 Downhill with curb.
    Turn the wheels toward
    the curb and edge the car
    forwards until the wheel
    lightly touches the curb.

    2 Uphill with curb. Turn
    the wheels away from the
    curb and edge the car
    backward until the wheel
    lightly touches the curb.

    3 Uphill or downhill without curb. Turn the wheel
    towards the edge of the
    road so that the car,
    should it move, will not
    roll towards the middle of
    the road.



  • Page 179

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 179 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    Long-term parking
    If the car is not going to be used for some
    time, e.g. three to four months, the following
    steps are recommended:
    • Drain the washer fluid reservoir and
    hoses.
    • Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
    seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors,
    and lubricate them with glycerol
    (glycerine).
    • After washing the car, dry the brake discs
    to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on
    the road and applying the brakes a few
    times.
    • Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation
    forming in it.
    • Top up the coolant and check the antifreeze before the onset of winter.

    • Park the car in a dry, covered and wellventilated building. Leave the parking
    brake OFF!
    • Convertible: If the car is stored, the soft
    top should be closed.
    • If necessary, use wheel chocks and leave
    the parking brake off.
    • Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
    If frost is likely to occur during the storage
    period, remove the battery and store it in
    a frost-free place.
    • If it is not possible to stand the car on axle
    stands, increase the tire pressure to
    43 psi (3 bar).
    Leave all the door windows open a crack
    and cover the car with a non-plastic
    tarpaulin – not one made of plastic which will
    not breath.

    179



  • Page 180

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 180 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    180

    Starting and driving

    Saab Parking
    Assistance 3
    Saab Parking Assistance

    WARNING
    Responsibility always lies with the driver
    when reversing.
    • The parking assistance system can
    facilitate parking and reversing.
    • Bear in mind that small objects, such
    as a child lying on the ground, and
    narrow objects cannot always be
    detected by the system.
    Saab Parking Assistance facilitates parking
    and reversing. There are four sensors in the
    rear bumper that detect objects up to 6 ft
    (1.8 meters) behind the car.
    If the car is heavily laden, the system may
    falsely indicate that there is an object within
    the detection range. This is since the sensors are angled towards the ground when
    the car is tail-heavy.

    Area monitored by the sensors seen from
    the side

    Area monitored by the sensors seen from
    above

    The system uses four sensors in the rear
    bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
    bounce back to the sensors off any objects
    behind the car. The system, however,
    cannot always detect small or narrow
    objects, such as a post, since the surface
    area presented to the car is too small.

    The system is activated automatically when
    reverse is engaged or selected. Audible
    confirmation is given and the following text
    is shown on the SID:
    Parking assistance
    active
    If a warning message, such as the seatbelt
    reminder, is shown on the SID when reverse
    is engaged, the audible signals from the
    parking assistance system will not be heard
    since the warning message has priority.
    When the sensors detect an object within
    the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - -)
    will be heard. The frequency of these pulses
    increases as the car comes closer to the
    object.



  • Page 181

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 181 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    If you stop the car with reverse gear
    engaged, the sound pulse will stop after
    2 seconds. The sound pulses will return if
    you continue to reverse. If the car rolls forward while reverse is engaged, the system
    is silenced.
    When the distance to the object is less
    than 1 ft. (30 cm), a continuous tone will
    be heard.

    Cars with trailer hitch

    NOTICE
    The sensors must be kept clean to function well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect
    their sensitivity.

    If the car has a trailer hitch and its wiring is
    correctly connected to the car’s electrical
    system, the Saab Parking Assistance automatically compensates for the protrusion of
    the tow bar.

    Large quantities of snow or dirt covering
    the sensors can prevent the parking
    assistance system from detecting any
    objects.

    If a camper or trailer is hitched up and the
    trailer hitch wiring is correctly connected to
    the car’s electrics, the system is automatically deactivated.

    Do not spray the sensors with a pressure
    washer, as this can damage them.

    You can temporarily deactivate the Saab
    Parking Assistance as follows:

    When an object is approximately 3 ft.
    (90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
    change character markedly (frequency
    increases). A distance of about 3 ft. (90 cm)
    is suitable if you wish to load or unload the
    trunk.

    Reversing alongside a wall

    If the distance between an object and a
    corner sensor does not change for
    3 seconds, for example if you are reversing
    alongside a wall, the system will switch to
    monitoring straight back. The system indicates if the distance to the wall decreases
    again.

    If the distance between an object and a
    corner sensor does not change for
    2 seconds, for example if you are reversing
    alongside a wall, the system will switch to
    monitoring straight back. The system indicates if the distance to the wall decreases
    again.

    If a trailer is hitched up and correctly connected to the trailer contact by the tow bar,
    the system is automatically deactivated.

    181

    • Engage reverse and press the CLR
    button on the SID control panel.
    The system will be reactivated the next time
    you engage reverse.



  • Page 182

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 182 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    182

    Starting and driving

    Error messages
    If the system malfunctions, the following
    message will appear on the SID:
    Parking assistance
    malfunction. Service.
    If the system is subject to interference, the
    following message will be shown on the
    SID:
    Parking assistance
    sensor interference.
    If this message appears, clean the sensors.
    The sensors are located in the black trim on
    the rear bumper

    The system can be switched off using
    Settings.
    1 Select Settings using the steering
    wheel controls,
    or
    .
    2 Press and hold the SET button until
    given audible confirmation.
    3 Select Park Assistance.
    4 Press the SET button.
    5 Select ON or OFF.
    6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
    button.
    Park Assistance
    ON
    OFF

    Explanation of ON and OFF.
    ON

    Saab Parking Assistance is activated
    automatically when reverse is
    engaged. The system warns of objects
    behind the car.
    If a trailer is hitched up and correctly
    connected to the trailer connector, the
    system will be deactivated automatically. You can also deactivate the system temporarily with the CLR button if
    reverse has been engaged and the
    system is active.
    OFF

    Saab Parking Assistance deactivated.



  • Page 183

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 183 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    Economical driving
    Factors affecting fuel
    consumption
    The fuel consumption of a car is greatly
    affected by driving conditions, climate, road
    conditions, speed, driving technique, etc.

    Breaking-in
    Fuel consumption may be somewhat
    higher during the break-in period (the
    first 3,000–4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km)).

    Weather conditions
    Summer temperatures give better fuel
    economy than winter ones. The difference
    can be as much as about 10%. Consumption increases in cold weather because the
    engine takes longer to reach its normal
    operating temperature. The transmission
    and wheel bearings also take longer to
    warm up. Even distance affects consumption: short journeys of 3–5 miles (5–8 km)
    do not give the engine enough time to
    reach its optimum temperature. Wind conditions also have a marked effect on fuel
    consumption.

    183

    How to read the diagram:
    If fuel consumption with the engine at
    normal temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/
    100 km), the actual fuel consumption
    3 miles (5 km) after the engine has started
    from cold will be:
    – 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.
    of 68°F (+20°C) (increase of 20%).
    – 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.
    of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
    – 14 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.
    of –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
    It is clear from the diagram that both distance driven and outside temperature have
    a significant impact on fuel consumption,
    after a cold start.
    If the car is normally driven on short journeys, 3–5 miles (5–8 km), for example to
    and from work, the average consumption
    will be 60–80% above the normal level.

    Percentage increase in fuel consumption
    of engine starting from cold compared to
    engine at normal temperature.

    Driving techniques
    • To obtain the best running economy, with
    regard to fuel consumption and general
    wear, the car must be serviced regularly.
    • High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
    frequent braking and much changing
    down all give higher fuel consumption.
    • Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
    in cold weather, the use of studded tires
    and roof racks, and towing a camper all
    increase fuel consumption.
    • Do not warm up the engine while the car
    is stationary.
    If idling, the engine will take much longer
    to reach its optimum temperature, and



  • Page 184

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 184 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    184

    Starting and driving

    engine wear is at its greatest during this
    period. Drive off as soon as possible after
    starting the engine and avoid high engine
    speeds.
    • Drive as smoothly and thoughtfully as
    possible. Match your driving to the
    prevailing traffic conditions.
    • Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher
    fuel consumption than driving in a high
    gear because of the higher engine speed
    for any given road speed. Always shift up
    as soon as traffic conditions allow and
    drive in the highest gear as much as
    possible.
    • Check the tire pressure once a month.
    Incorrect tire pressure increases tire
    wear. It is preferable for the tire pressure
    to be slightly high than too low. Underpressure increases fuel consumption.

    • Check the fuel consumption regularly.
    Increased fuel consumption can indicate
    that something is wrong and that the car
    needs to be checked. We recommend
    that you contact a Saab dealer.

    Engine block heater 3

    Practical road tests have demonstrated that
    substantial savings in fuel consumption can
    be made if the above advice is followed.






    WARNING
    Never switch off the engine while driving
    as the effect of the brakes and power
    steering will be greatly reduced.

    Road conditions
    Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do
    unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
    (the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
    less than the additional amount required to
    climb the hill).

    The following are just some of the benefits
    to the car and the environment of using an
    engine block heater:
    Lower fuel consumption.
    Reduced wear on the engine.
    Inside of car warms up faster.
    Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
    over short runs.

    The engine heater is effective at outside
    temperatures up to 60–70°F (+15–+20°C).
    The warmer it is outside, the shorter the time
    the engine heater needs to be connected.
    Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
    If the car is equipped with a removable,
    electric cabin heater that is not in use, store
    this in the trunk.



  • Page 185

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 185 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    Driving in cold weather
    In cold weather, special attention should be
    paid to the following:
    • Before driving off, make sure that the
    wiper blades have not frozen to the windshield.
    • Remove any snow from the heating
    system air intakes between the hood and
    the windshield.
    • If necessary, inject oil into the locks to
    prevent them from freezing. Use molybdenum-sulphide oil (MoS2). If the locks
    freeze, exercise care when unlocking the
    car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking
    the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.
    • It is particularly important when the roads
    are slippery that the brakes and tires are
    in good condition.
    • For how to check the level of antifreeze in
    the engine coolant, see page 209.

    • Add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling
    several times before the onset of winter.
    This will prevent condensation water in
    the fuel tank from freezing and causing
    interruptions in the fuel supply. The likelihood of condensation is lowest when the
    fuel tank is full.
    If the car is parked outside and the
    temperature is below zero, gasoline antifreeze is of little use as it cannot remove
    water that has already frozen. Park the
    car in a warm place so that any ice that
    may have built up melts, then add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling.
    Condensation is caused by temperature
    fluctuations, either in the outside temperature alone or when the car is alternately
    parked outdoors and in a garage.
    • Convertible: Avoid operating the soft top
    at temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).

    185

    • The car is equipped with tires designed to
    provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
    roads, although this has been achieved at
    the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
    snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
    and ice, we therefore recommend that
    winter tires be fitted. However, winter tires
    achieve this extra grip at the expense of
    grip on bare road surfaces.
    Winter tires, particularly studded tires, generally make driving safer on snow and ice.
    Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions governing the use of different
    types of winter tires and snow chains.
    Studded tires are not allowed in some
    countries. If winter tires are fitted, the same
    type must be fitted to all four wheels. Your
    Saab dealer will be pleased to advise you on
    the best tires for your car.



  • Page 186

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 186 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    186

    Starting and driving

    Remember that tires age: it may therefore
    be necessary to change winter tires before
    they reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually lose their friction properties with age.
    If you get into a front wheel skid and the car
    has a manual transmission, the best
    response is to freewheel, which means
    declutching so that the wheels neither drive
    nor brake, and to cautiously steer in the
    desired direction.

    Driving with tire chains 3
    Snow chains must only be fitted to the wheel
    and tire dimensions that Saab recommends
    in "Technical data" on page 279.
    We recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer regarding approved tire chains. See
    also page 248.

    WARNING

    If the car has automatic transmission, ease
    off the accelerator slightly and steer cautiously in the desired direction.

    • Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph
    (50 km/h) when tire chains are fitted.

    If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the
    same direction as the movement of the rear
    of the car.

    • Tire chains can reduce directional
    stability.
    • Do not fit tire chains to the car’s rear
    wheels.

    NOTICE
    • Check the links frequently for wear.
    • Check that the chains do not foul the
    wheel arch liner at full lock.
    • Refer to the "Technical data" section
    on page 279, for information on wheel
    and tire dimensions approved for the
    fitting of tire chains.



  • Page 187

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 187 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    Driving in hot climates
    Always check the coolant level before starting a journey. When the engine is cold, the
    coolant must not lie above the KALT/COLD
    mark on the expansion tank (boundary
    between the upper and lower sections of the
    tank).
    At the end of a journey, allow the engine to
    idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.
    If the needle on the temperature gauge
    enters the red zone, the following message
    will be shown on the SID:
    Hot engine. Make a
    safe stop. Idle engine.
    1 Stop the car but do not switch off the
    engine. Do not remove the cap on the
    cooling system expansion tank, even if
    the tank is empty. The engine temperature should decrease. If the temperature
    continues to rise with the engine idling,
    the engine must be switched off.

    2 If the engine is idling and the needle on
    the temperature gauge falls, wait until a
    normal temperature is shown (about in
    the middle of the scale) before switching
    off the engine. If the coolant needs to be
    topped up, carefully unscrew the
    expansion tank cap.
    Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %
    antifreeze and 50 % clean water. Use an
    antifreeze approved by Saab.

    WARNING
    • Exercise care when opening the hood
    if the engine is overheated. Never
    remove the expansion tank cap
    completely when the engine is hot.
    • The cooling system is pressurized hot coolant and vapour can escape.
    These can cause injury to your eyes
    and burns. Open the cap slowly to
    release the pressure before removing
    it.
    3 Have the car’s cooling system checked.
    We recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer.

    187



  • Page 188

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 188 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    188

    Starting and driving

    Towing a trailer 3
    WARNING
    • Do not drive with a trailer on inclines
    steeper than 15 %. The load on the
    drive (front) wheels will be so low that
    the wheels can start to spin and
    prevent further progress.
    • In addition, the car’s parking brake
    may not always be sufficient to hold
    the car and trailer securely, as the
    wheels may start to slide.

    Trailer hitch attachment 3
    Trailer hitch attachments are available as
    accessories. These are designed for a maximum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),
    with trailer brakes.
    An electrical connection 3 for the towbar
    and an electrical unit are provided in the
    electrical centre on the left-hand side of the
    luggage compartment.

    • Always apply the trailer’s parking
    brake when unhitching it. There is
    otherwise a risk of personal injury or
    damage to the bumper should the
    trailer start to roll.

    If the car has a 13-pin Saab genuine electrical socket then it is possible to supply a
    trailer/caravan with rear fog lights and
    reversing lights. The caravan can also have
    interior and exterior lighting even when the
    car’s ignition is switched off. In which case,
    remember not to load the battery for too
    long so that it is discharged and prevents the car from starting.

    • When you hitch up the trailer be sure
    to attach its safety chains to the holes
    by the hitch.

    There is also access to power in the caravan
    during a journey, the caravan battery can be
    charged for example.

    Make sure you are familiar with the legal
    requirements regarding speed limits for
    towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer
    braking requirements, and also any special driving licence provisions.

    Also, if the car has SPA, this is deactivated
    automatically if a trailer is hitched up and
    correctly connected to the Saab genuine
    trailer socket.
    Saab recommendations:
    • Use a genuine Saab trailer hitch that is
    designed and tested for your Saab.
    • Contact your Saab dealer for advice on
    which trailer hitch is designed for your car.



  • Page 189

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 189 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    NOTICE
    • Only use a towbar that has been
    approved for your car. We recommend that you entrust towbar installation to an authorised Saab workshop,
    which can also provide important
    information such as trailer weight.
    Your authorised Saab workshop has
    information on how the towbar is to be
    installed and whether other measures
    must be undertaken that could affect
    the cooling system or other equipment
    • We recommend that you contact a
    Saab dealer for guidance on how to
    connect a trailer hitch.
    • Exercise care when driving on uneven
    roads or against the curb if the car is
    heavily laden. This particularly applies
    to cars with 17" wheels.

    189

    Recommendations for cars with
    automatic transmission

    When negotiating long hills, bear the following important considerations in mind.

    The following driving time limits are based
    on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
    weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (+30°C).

    Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
    by the temperature gauge in the main instrument panel.

    Gradient of Max. trailer
    hill, %
    weight, lbs.
    (kg)
    6-8
    3330 (1500)
    9-11
    3080 (1400)
    12-14
    2645 (1200)
    max. 15
    2200 (1000)

    The following steps are taken in order as the
    temperature of the transmission increases:

    Time limit,
    minutes
    unlimited
    max. 15
    max. 15
    max. 15

    The following driving time limits are based
    on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
    weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (+40°C).
    Gradient of Max. trailer
    hill, %
    weight, lbs.
    (kg)
    6-8
    2200 (1000)
    9-11
    1760 (800)
    12-14
    1100 (500)
    max. 15
    880 (400)

    Time limit,
    minutes
    unlimited
    max. 15
    max. 15
    max. 15

    • Gear change pattern is altered
    • A/C compressor is switched off
    • Max. engine torque is reduced
    The following message will be displayed on
    the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
    too hot:
    Gearbox too hot. Make a
    safe stop. Open hood.
    If this message appears, stop the car as
    soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
    engine to idle until the message has gone
    out. The selector lever should be in
    position P.



  • Page 190

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 190 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    190

    Starting and driving

    When continuing your journey, manually
    select a low gear in which the engine speed
    is about 3,500 rpm until the incline eases
    (see page 168).

    WARNING
    Remember to use engine-braking (selector position M1, M2, or M3) to spare the
    brakes when you are driving on a long or
    steep downhill slope.
    Overheating can cause the brakes to
    fade!

    Recommendations for cars with
    manual transmission
    Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
    by the temperature gauge in the main instrument panel.
    When the needle is just outside the red
    zone, the A/C compressor will be switched
    off and, on certain engine variants, the maximum engine torque will be limited.
    When continuing your journey, select a low
    gear in which the engine speed is about
    3,500 rpm until the incline eases.

    WARNING
    Remember to use engine-braking (selector position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
    when you are driving on a long or steep
    downhill slope.
    Overheating can cause the brakes to
    fade!

    Distribution of load in trailer
    a Light
    b Moderate
    c Heavy

    Trailer hitch load
    The weight distribution on the trailer makes
    a lot of difference to the handling properties
    of the car and trailer combination. With a
    two-wheel trailer, concentrate the load over
    the wheels and keep it as low as possible.
    The trailer should be loaded so that the load
    on the towball is 110–165 lbs. (50–75 kg).
    Note that this load must be included in the
    total load for the car. If this now exceeds the
    specified load capacity, the load in the trunk
    may have to be reduced by the corresponding amount.



  • Page 191

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 191 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    191

    Checks before driving

    Driving considerations

    Reversing

    Make sure that the car and trailer are in
    good working order. This is essential since
    towing a trailer increases the strain on the
    car.

    Always take extra care when towing a
    trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
    and its braking performance reduced. The
    trailer’s braking system and suspension
    also have a considerable effect on these
    characteristics. See also "Driving with a
    load" on page 194.

    Get someone to help you keep an eye out
    behind the trailer as the door mirrors do not
    always provide sufficient rearward vision
    when reversing.

    • Check and if necessary adjust the tire
    pressure of the car and trailer.
    • Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
    tightened.
    • Make sure that the equipment joining the
    car and trailer is properly secured and
    adjusted.
    • Make sure the trailer’s electrical cable is
    properly connected and is not so long that
    it drags along the ground. Also, make
    sure the cable is not too short and risks
    breaking when turning a corner.
    • Check all bulbs.
    • Check the car and trailer brakes.
    • Make sure that all items on or in the
    camper or trailer are properly secured.
    • Make sure that the trailer’s jockey wheel
    is raised and locked.
    • Check the distribution of the load so that
    the car and trailer are well balanced.
    • Check that the rearview mirrors provide
    the best possible rearward vision.
    • Make sure the trailer’s safety cable is
    correctly attached.

    Drive carefully:





    descending hills
    on uneven roads
    over railway crossings
    when meeting large vehicles

    If the car has automatic transmission, select
    gear M1 when ascending or descending
    steep hills.



  • Page 192

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 192 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    192

    Starting and driving

    Driving with a roof rack
    load
    WARNING
    • A roof load will affect the car’s center
    of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
    aware of this when cornering and driving in crosswinds.
    • Adjust your speed to the prevailing
    conditions.
    • Due to higher aerodynamics drag, fuel
    economy may suffer when driving with
    a roof rack.
    The maximum permissible roof load is
    220 lbs. (100 kg). Note that the roof load
    must be included in the car’s maximum permissible payload and axle load.
    Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed specially for your car are available from your
    Saab dealer. Always secure roof loads
    securely.

    Fitting roof carriers 3
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi without
    roof rails
    1 Open the four covers on the roof of the
    car.
    2 Insert a screw with washer into each roof
    carrier foot. Fit a seal onto each screw.
    3 The roof carriers are marked front and
    back.
    4 Bolt the roof carriers to the brackets in
    the roof.
    5 Check that the roof carriers are firmly
    mounted.

    Mounting holes for roof carrier



  • Page 193

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 193 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    Fitting roof carriers 3
    SportCombi with roof rails
    1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
    2 Check the markings on the cross
    members to see which is the front and
    which is the rear roof carrier.
    3 Place the cross members on the roof
    rails, on their respective sides of the
    centre supports. The cross members
    must not be placed beyond the front or
    rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the
    distance between the cross members is
    at least 700 mm.
    If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
    members must be positioned so that the
    tailgate can be opened fully without
    hitting the roof box.
    4 Using your thumb, press the bracket
    so that it lies snugly against the
    outside of the roof rail. Make sure that
    the roof carriers are seated centrally on
    the rubber spacers and that these sit
    correctly on the roof rail. Pull the spacers
    down slightly on the inside of the roof
    rail.
    5 Centre the roof carriers so that they
    protrude equally on both sides.
    6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
    Ensure that the tightening knobs are
    upright once the roof carriers have been
    tightened.
    7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
    in place.

    193



  • Page 194

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 194 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    194

    Starting and driving

    Driving with a load
    The handling characteristics are affected by
    how the car is loaded.

    Driving with the trunk lid
    open

    NOTICE
    WARNING

    NOTICE
    • Place the heaviest load as far forward
    and as low as possible in the trunk.
    • Secure the load to the lashing eyes
    (see page 139).
    • Heavy loads mean that the car’s
    center of gravity is further back. As a
    result, the car will sway more during
    evasive steering.
    • Never exceed the permissible load of
    the roof box, even if there is room for
    more.
    • Ensure that the tire pressure is correct
    – slight overinflation is preferable to
    underinflation.
    • The braking distance of a loaded car is
    always greater. Keep your distance
    from the vehicle in front.
    • Do not exceed the car’s permissible
    gross vehicle weight or axle load (see
    page 280).
    • Roof loads can negatively affect telecommunication.
    For further information on tires see
    page 241.

    Driving in deep water

    Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or
    fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
    drawn into the cabin.
    If you must drive with the trunk lid open,
    close all windows and the moonroof (if
    equipped) and set the cabin fan to its highest speed setting.

    Do not drive in puddles or water deeper
    than 7 in. (20 cm) and do not drive faster
    than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
    sucked into the engine. The engine will be
    seriously damaged if water enters the
    intake system.



  • Page 195

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 195 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving

    Driving at night
    Bear in mind the following points, especially
    when driving at night:
    • Nighttime driving requires your full
    concentration
    • Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
    slightly longer.
    • The number of drivers under the influence
    of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
    during the day.
    • Do not stare at the headlights of oncoming vehicles.
    • Avoid driving at night if you have poor
    eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
    age.
    • Keep your car’s headlights, windows and
    mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
    make sure they are clean.
    • Make sure you are well rested before
    starting a long journey. Take a break
    every other hour.
    • Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
    tendency to induce tiredness.
    • Wild animals prefer to move at dusk and
    dawn.
    • Check the headlight levelling setting (see
    page 97).

    Towing the car
    WARNING
    • Remember that the brake servo does
    not operate when the engine is off.
    Much greater pressure than normal
    will therefore be required to operate
    the brake pedal.
    • Nor does the steering servo operate
    when the engine is off. The steering
    will therefore be much heavier than
    usual.
    • The towing vehicle should always be
    heavier than the vehicle on tow.
    • Never allow passengers to ride in the
    car when it is on tow.
    • Always seek professional help if the
    car needs to be recovered.
    • The ignition switch must be in the ON
    position if the car is moved with the
    engine not running.
    • The steering wheel lock must be
    disengaged before towing the car.
    • The steering wheel lock disengages
    when the remote control is inserted
    into the ignition switch, if the battery
    has sufficient charge.

    195

    Front towing eye
    WARNING
    • Make sure that the towing eye is
    screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand
    thread!
    • The towing eye is only designed for
    towing the car on roads. It must not
    be used to pull the car out of a ditch,
    for example.
    • Make sure that all bystanders keep a
    suitable distance, in case the towing
    eye or tow rope should snap. The
    towing eye or tow rope could catapult
    off and cause seriously injury.
    • Never drive with the towing eye fitted
    to the front bumper. Return it to its
    designated storage space.



  • Page 196

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 196 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    196

    Starting and driving

    Front towing eye fitted.
    The towing eye has a left-hand thread!
    The front towing eye is stowed by the spare
    wheel. On the left-hand side of the bumper
    is a cover concealing the attachment point
    (tapped hole) for the towing eye.
    1 Press the knob on the upper section of
    this cover at the same time as pulling out
    the lower edge.
    2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing
    eye has a left-hand thread!
    3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to
    tighten it properly.
    To refit the cover: Start by inserting the top
    edge of the cover. Then click in the lower
    edge, one corner at a time.

    Rear towing eye

    Rear towing eye

    Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
    unstuck.

    Towing the car

    The car has a permanent towing eye at the
    rear under the bumper.

    NOTICE

    If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can
    be used instead of the towing eye.

    Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
    unstuck.
    Engage neutral (automatic transmission:
    move the selector lever to N). Turn on the
    parking lights.
    Drive carefully and do not exceed the
    speed limit for vehicles on tow.



  • Page 197

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 197 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    Transporting the car

    Always try to keep the towrope taut by
    gently applying the brake of the car on tow,
    as necessary. This will avoid the towrope
    being jerked violently.

    NOTICE
    If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is
    transported, for example on a flat bed
    truck, take extra care not to damage the
    spoiler and/or underbody.

    Cars with automatic transmission:

    NOTICE
    • The car must be towed front first.
    • If the car is to be towed with the front
    wheels off the ground, make sure the
    parking brake is off, as this acts on the
    rear wheels.
    Always observe the speed limit for vehicles
    on tow. Whatever the speed limit, the car
    must not be towed at speeds exceeding
    30 mph (50 km/h) nor for a distance of more
    than 30 miles (50 km). If the car needs to be
    transported over a longer distance, a tow
    truck or flatbed truck must be called out.
    The engine cannot be started by towing or
    pushing the car. In an emergency, the
    engine can be started as described under
    "Jump starting" on page 198.

    197

    Attachment points for anchorage straps

    Vehicle recovery
    If the car has to be transported on a flatbed
    truck, or similar, it must be securely
    strapped down. There are attachment
    points for this purpose on the underside of
    the car. The attachment points are oblong
    hole that have been reinforced to cope with
    the stresses that arise during this type of
    transport.



  • Page 198

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 198 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    198

    Starting and driving

    Jump starting
    WARNING
    • When working on the battery, highly
    explosive gas can build up. A spark
    could ignite this gas that collects
    around the battery. Therefore, always
    avoid sparks and open flames in the
    vicinity of the battery.
    • The battery contains corrosive sulphuric acid. Always wear a face mask or
    goggles when working on the battery.
    • If battery acid gets into the eyes or
    splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
    the affected area liberally with water. If
    acid gets into the eyes or a large quantity makes contact with the skin, seek
    medical help.

    NOTICE

    NOTICE

    Ignoring these steps could result in costly
    damage to your vehicle that would not be
    covered by your warranty.

    If the other system is not a 12-volt system
    with a negative ground, both vehicles can
    be damaged.

    Trying to start your car by pushing or pulling it could damage your vehicle, even if
    you have a manual transmission. If you
    have an automatic transmission, your
    vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
    pulling it.
    It is essential when a donor battery is to be
    used to jump start the car that the jump
    leads be connected correctly to prevent
    arcing.
    To jump start your vehicle:
    1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
    12-volt battery with a negative ground
    system.

    2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
    jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
    vehicles are not touching each other. If
    a poor connection on the negative
    jumper cable should exist, it is possible
    for damage to be caused to electrical
    systems/components of either vehicle
    should inadvertent contact be made.
    You would not be able to start your car
    and bad grounding could damage the
    electrical systems.

    WARNING
    You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
    Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in P
    (Park) or a manual transmission in
    Neutral.
    3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
    Turn off lights that are not needed, and
    radios. This will avoid sparks and help
    save both batteries and it could save
    your radio.



  • Page 199

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 199 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Starting and driving
    WARNING
    Using a match or flame of any kind near a
    battery can cause battery gas to explode.
    You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
    flashlight if you need more light.
    Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
    frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
    When connecting jumper cables to a
    frozen battery, gas from the chemical
    reaction inside the battery can build up
    under the ice and cause an explosion.
    Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
    you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
    flush the area with water and get medical
    help immediately.

    Jump starting

    NOTICE
    If you leave your radio on, it could be
    badly damaged. The repairs would not be
    covered by your warranty.
    4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
    Find the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals on the battery.

    WARNING
    An electric fan can start up even when the
    engine is not running and can injure you.
    Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
    any underhood electric fan.

    5 Check that the jumper cables do not
    have loose or missing insulation. If they
    do, you could get a shock and also the
    vehicles could be damaged.
    Before you connect the cables, here are
    some basic things you should know.
    Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
    negative (–) will go to negative (–). Do
    not connect (+) to (–) or you will get a
    short that could injure you or would
    damage the battery and maybe other
    parts as well.
    6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
    positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
    the discharged battery.

    199

    7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
    Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
    the good battery. Use a remote positive
    (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
    8 Now connect the negative (–) cable to
    the good battery’s negative terminal.
    9 Attach the cable to the discharged
    battery’s negative terminal.
    10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
    and run the engine for a while.
    11 Try to start the vehicle with the
    discharged battery. If it does not start
    after a few tries, it probably needs
    service.
    Note. If the current in the low battery is
    too low it might be necessary to wait
    several minutes with the cables
    connected before you can start the
    engine with the low battery.
    12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
    prevent electrical shorting. Take care
    that they do not touch each other or any
    other metal.



  • Page 200

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 200 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    200

    Starting and driving

    Using a battery charger 3/starter
    unit
    To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
    system and electronics, the following rules
    must be followed when charging the battery
    or jump starting the car.
    • If the charger or starter unit can be set to
    different voltages (6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V
    must be selected.
    • Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
    supplied with the charger or starter unit.
    • No other apparatus that are grounded or
    connected to the mains must be
    connected to the car during charging or
    jump starting.
    • The charger or starter unit must under no
    conditions produce a voltage greater
    than:
    • 16V continuous
    • 18V for 60 min.
    If you are unsure about the charge rating of
    the unit, disconnect the battery clamp from
    the positive terminal before connecting the
    unit to the battery.

    For long trips
    Before starting off on a long journey, it is
    advisable to have your car inspected by
    your Saab dealer.
    Obtain a few important items to take along
    on your journey, such as spare bulbs, wiper
    blades, fuses, a drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
    the like.
    You can check some points yourself beforehand:
    • Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the
    engine or gearbox/transmission.
    • Check the coolant and power steering
    fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
    • Inspect the drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
    replace if it shows any signs of wear.
    • Check the battery charge.
    • Check the tires for tread pattern and air
    pressure, including the compact spare
    tire.
    • Take an extra remote control and keep it
    separate.
    • Check the brakes.
    • Check all bulbs.
    • Check for the presence of the tool kit and
    jack in the car.



  • Page 201

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 201 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    201

    Car care
    Hood ________________
    Engine ______________
    Engine bay, 4-cyl engine
    Engine bay, V6 engine _
    Engine oil ____________
    Air filter______________
    Transmission fluid ____
    Coolant ______________
    Brake/clutch fluid and
    brake pads__________
    Power steering________
    Battery ______________
    Drive belt ____________
    Wipers and washers ___
    Wiper blades _________
    Changing bulbs _______
    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    202
    202
    205
    206
    207
    209
    209
    209
    211
    212
    213
    216
    217
    217
    219

    Fuses ________________
    Tires _________________
    Compact spare ________
    Changing a tire ________
    Safety belts ___________
    Upholstery and trim ____
    Textile carpeting _______
    Engine bay____________
    Washing ______________
    Waxing and polishing ___
    Touching up the paint___
    Anti-corrosion treatment
    Recovery and/or
    recycling of automotive
    materials ____________
    Air conditioning (A/C) ___

    234
    241
    254
    257
    260
    260
    261
    261
    261
    264
    264
    265

    267
    268



  • Page 202

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 202 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    202

    Car care

    Hood

    Engine

    The hood release handle is located on the
    left under the instrument panel. Open the
    hood in the following way:
    1 Pull the release handle.
    2 The hood moves to the half-locked position and is stopped by a safety catch at
    the front edge.
    3 Press the lever of the catch upwards and
    raise the hood.

    Turbo 4-cylinder engine

    When you close the hood you should drop it
    from a height of about 12 inches (30 cm),
    without slamming it.

    The engine is a transverse four-cylinder inline engine with twin overhead camshafts
    and 16 valves.
    The engine is equipped with two balanceshafts that reduce engine vibrations to a
    minimum.

    Hood release handle

    Hood release catch plate

    The balance shafts are chain-driven and
    rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
    They produce forces and torques that are
    opposed to those generated by the pistons
    and connecting rods. The effect occurs
    twice in each revolution of the engine, counteracting the vibration from its moving parts,
    and at the same time reducing unwanted
    engine noise.
    The gearbox, located on the right (viewed
    from the front), is integrated with the engine.

    Turbo V6 engine
    The V6 engine is a turbocharged V6 engine
    produced completely of aluminium with 60°
    between the cylinder banks, 4 valves per
    cylinder, 2 camshafts per bank.
    The camshafts are driven via a chain transmission. The engine is equipped with a
    turbo whose turbine collects exhaust pressure from both banks of cylinders.
    To obtain optimum performance, fuel consumption and low emission levels the



  • Page 203

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 203 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    engine is equipped with CVCP (Continuous
    Variable Cam Phasing). This means that
    the engine’s intake camshafts can be
    adjusted to achieve optimum functionality.
    The switches are hydraulic.

    Engine families
    Saab cars imported into the United States
    and Canada meet all applicable emission
    control standards. The engine family and
    appropriate tune-up specifications are identified on a label in the engine bay.
    These engine families meet applicable EPA
    Federal Standards, California State Standards and Canadian Federal Standards and
    are equipped with the following systems:





    sequential multiport fuel injection system
    three way catalytic converter
    crankcase emissions control system
    evaporative emission system.

    203

    Emission control
    systems

    Saab Trionic engine
    management system, 4-cyl
    engine

    The systems for controlling emissions to the
    atmosphere require regular checking and
    adjustment at the intervals specified in the
    service program.

    The Saab Trionic engine management
    system is a unique Saab development that
    combines sequential multiport fuel injection,
    electronic distributorless ignition and turbocharger boost pressure control into one system.

    In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
    regulations and thereby helping to keep the
    environment clean, a correctly tuned engine
    will also give maximum fuel economy.

    WARNING
    Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
    and certain vehicle components contain
    or emit chemicals known to the State of
    California to cause cancer and birth
    defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
    and certain products of component wear
    contain or emit chemicals known to the
    State of California to cause cancer and
    birth defects or other reproductive harm.

    The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
    monitors many different engine parameters
    such as:







    Intake manifold pressure.
    Intake air temperature.
    Crankshaft position.
    Engine coolant temperature.
    Throttle position.
    The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.

    The ECM receives information regarding
    engine knocking from a sophisticated feedback function in the ignition discharge unit.
    By processing all of this information, the Trionic system can control fuel injector opening duration, ignition timing and turbocharger boost pressure to provide excellent
    engine performance while maintaining low
    emissions and fuel consumption.



  • Page 204

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 204 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    204

    Car care

    NOTICE
    The Trionic engine management system
    continuously monitors the operation of
    these systems and has on-board diagnostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
    malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
    the main instrument illuminates, the
    Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The
    car will continue to operate, but performance may be diminished. You should
    have your car checked by a workshop as
    soon as possible. We recommend that
    you contact a Saab dealer.

    Bosch ME9 engine management
    system, V6 engine
    The Bosch ME9 engine management
    system is a system that combines sequential multiport fuel injection, electronic distributorless ignition and turbocharger boost
    pressure control into one system and intake
    camshaft phasing control.
    The ME9 engine control module (ECM)
    monitors many different engine parameters
    such as:







    Charge air pressure.
    Intake air temperature.
    Crankshaft position.
    Engine coolant temperature.
    Throttle position.
    The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.

    By processing all of this information, the
    ME9 system can control fuel injector opening duration, ignition timing, intake camshaft
    phasing and turbocharger boost pressure to
    provide excellent engine performance while
    maintaining low emissions and fuel consumption.

    NOTICE
    The ME9 engine management system
    continuously monitors the operation of
    these systems and has on-board diagnostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
    malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
    the main instrument illuminates, the ME9
    ECM has detected a problem. The car will
    continue to operate, but performance
    may be diminished. You should have your
    car checked by a workshop as soon as
    possible. We recommend that you
    contact a Saab dealer.

    ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
    Recovery)
    All hydrocarbons formed when refueling will
    be recovered by the car and not released
    into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are
    absorbed in an evaporative emission canister. When the engine is subsequently
    started, the evaporative emission canister is
    gradually purged as air is sucked into it
    through a shut-off valve. The hydrocarbon/air mixture passes through the evap
    canister purge valve and into the engine
    where it is burned. “Refueling”, see
    page 157.
    When refueling, make sure you screw the
    filler cap on and keep turning until it has
    clicked 3 times.



  • Page 205

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 205 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Engine bay, 4-cyl engine
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    Oil filler cap
    Coolant reservoir
    Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
    Battery
    Fuse box
    Washer-fluid reservoir
    Power-steering fluid reservoir
    Engine-oil dipstick

    205



  • Page 206

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 206 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    206

    Car care

    Engine bay, V6 engine
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    Power-steering fluid resrvoir
    Coolant reservoir
    Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
    Battery
    Fuse box
    Washer-fluid reservoir
    Oil filler cap
    Engine-oil dipstick



  • Page 207

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 207 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    207

    Engine oil
    Checking the oil level
    Check the engine oil level regularly.
    1 Park the car on a level ground.
    2 Switch off the engine and wait for
    2–5 minutes. The engine should be at
    normal operating temperature.
    3 Take the dipstick out and wipe it off with
    a clean rag before carrying out the
    check.
    The level must not be below the MIN mark
    on the dipstick, but nor should it be above
    the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could
    result in abnormal oil consumption.
    The distance between the MIN and MAX
    marks is equivalent to 1.0 qt (1.0 l).

    NOTICE
    Too high oil level can damage the engine.

    Oil filler cap and dipstick, 4-cyl engine

    4-cyl engine: The engine oil level is
    checked each time the engine is started. If
    the oil level is low, the following message
    appears on the SID:
    Low engine oil level.
    Fill oil now.
    If this occurs the oil level must be checked
    first. If the level is too low then it must be
    topped up.

    Oil filler cap and dipstick, V6 engine

    V6 engine: The engine has an oil level
    sensor that checks the oil level when the
    engine is running. If the oil level drops too
    low, the following message appears on the
    SID:
    Low engine oil level.
    Fill oil now.
    If this occurs the oil level must be checked
    first. If the level is too low then it must be
    topped up.



  • Page 208

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 208 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    208

    Car care

    Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap
    properly after topping up the oil to avoid
    running problems.
    It is normal for an engine to consume a certain amount of oil. It is therefore often necessary to top up the oil between services.
    Check the engine oil level regularly.
    During the Break-in Period (approx.
    3,000 miles or 5,000 km) and when driving
    at high speeds or with a trailer, the oil consumption may be higher than normal.

    NOTICE
    Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
    required more frequently if the car is
    being used under certain conditions, see
    page 275.

    WARNING
    • Prolonged and repeated exposure of
    the skin to engine oil can cause serious skin disorders. Avoid prolonged
    skin contact whenever possible.
    • Used engine oil contains chemicals
    that have caused cancer in laboratory
    animals. Always protect your skin by
    washing thoroughly with soap and
    water.
    • Keep oil out of reach of children.
    • Do not touch the turbocharger or
    exhaust manifold. These get very hot
    when the engine has been running.
    • Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
    engine as this could cause a fire. Used
    engine oil is particularly flammable.
    • Protect the environment. Do not
    dispose of oil into the ground or down
    a drain. Dispose of all used oil and
    oil filters at an appropriate disposal
    facility.

    NOTICE
    • Do not run the engine with the oil level
    too low.
    • Change engine oil and oil filter in
    accordance with the service
    programme
    • Only use the recommended type of oil.
    Observe the above three points to avoid
    serious damage to the engine.
    For oil volumes and grades, refer to
    page 284.



  • Page 209

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 209 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Air filter

    Coolant
    WARNING

    To ensure reliable operation, only use
    an air filter recommended by Saab
    Automobile AB.

    Transmission fluid
    Manual transmission
    Check and top up the oil in accordance with
    the service program.
    Automatic transmission
    Check and top up the oil in accordance with
    the service program.

    WARNING
    • Proceed with caution if the radiator is
    boiling when you open the hood.
    Never remove the expansion-tank
    filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
    • The cooling system is pressurized –
    hot coolant and vapor can escape
    when the filler cap is released. These
    can cause injury to your eyes and
    burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
    let the engine cool before removing
    the cap.
    • Exercise care when adding coolant.
    Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
    fire risk.
    There is an overpressure in the cooling system. Coolant temperatures can sometimes
    exceed 212° F (100° C).
    If the coolant level drops too low, the following message appears on the SID:
    Coolant level low.
    Refill.
    The properties of the coolant are retained
    for the entire service life of the car. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the coolant.

    209

    The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and
    anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best
    cooling effect. Lower concentrations should
    be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.
    Coolants of a different brand could damage
    the engine or cooling system. We therefore
    recommend strict use of coolants that have
    been approved by Saab.

    NOTICE
    If the cooling system needs topping up,
    mix the antifreeze with the appropriate
    quantity of drinking water or distilled
    water before adding it to the system.
    If undiluted antifreeze is added, the
    engine could still freeze and be damaged.
    This is because the antifreeze will not mix
    properly with the coolant before the thermostat has opened to allow full circulation.
    Note:
    If incorrect coolant is used or added, the lifetime properties will be affected. Even if the
    coolant is flushed from the system and
    replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
    properties are no longer retained and the
    coolant must then be drained and replaced
    at regular intervals.



  • Page 210

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 210 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    210

    Car care

    Coolant expansion tank, 4-cyl engine

    Coolant expansion tank, V6 engine

    Level markings, V6 engine
    1 HOT
    2 COLD

    4-cyl engine: The expansion tank is transparent to facilitate checking the coolant
    level.
    When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie
    on or just above the KALT/COLD mark on
    the expansion tank (boundary between the
    upper and lower sections of the tank, see
    illustration).
    Top up with a mixture of equal parts of
    Saab-approved concentrated coolant and
    clean water. We recommend that you contact an authorised Saab workshop.
    If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
    is added, run the engine until warm so that
    the thermostat opens. Top up the tank
    again, as necessary.

    V6 engine: The expansion tank is not transparent. The cap must be unscrewed so that
    the coolant level can be checked. When the
    cap is screwed off there are two level markings, HOT and COLD.
    When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie
    on or just above the COLD mark in the
    expansion tank.



  • Page 211

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 211 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Brake/clutch fluid and
    brake pads
    WARNING
    Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
    old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
    water from the air and, in time, could allow
    vapor to form in the brake system, thus
    reducing its performance. It is therefore
    important that brake fluid be changed
    regularly, as specified in the service
    program.

    Checking
    Brake fluid should be changed according to
    the service program. Refer to the Warranty
    and Service Book.

    211

    If the level drops too low, the following
    message appears on the SID:
    Brake fluid level low.
    Make a safe stop.
    Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake
    fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.
    Use only new brake fluid from a sealed
    container.
    The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
    the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
    reservoir corresponds to the amount of
    brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
    the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
    normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
    necessary.

    The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is transparent to facilitate checking of the fluid level.

    If the brake fluid should require changing, this must be carried out at a Saab
    dealer. We recommend that you contact
    a Saab dealer.

    The fluid level should lie between the MAX
    and MIN marks.

    The foot brake and parking brake are selfadjusting.
    It is not possible to detect, through abnormal
    pedal or parking brake lever travel, whether
    the brake pads are worn and need replacing. It is therefore essential that brake pads
    be checked regularly, as specified in the
    service program.

    Brake fluid reservoir

    NOTICE
    Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
    since it can cause the paint to bubble and
    lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
    should be flushed with large quantities of
    water as quickly as possible.
    Brake pads should only be changed at a
    workshop. We recommend that you contact a Saab dealer.



  • Page 212

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 212 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    212

    Car care

    Power steering
    WARNING
    Power steering fluid on hot engine
    components constitutes a fire risk.
    Check the level of the power steering fluid in
    the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
    the service program.
    The wheels should point directly forwards
    during this check.
    Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.
    Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw
    down the cap completely and then remove
    it again.
    The oil level should lie between the MAX
    and MIN marks when the oil temperature is
    about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder, the
    level will be lower, and at a higher temperatures the level will be higher.
    Top up with CHF 11S or CHF 202 power
    steering fluid.

    Power steering fluid reservoir, 4-cyl
    engine

    Power steering fluid reservoir, V6 engine



  • Page 213

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 213 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Battery

    If frequent short journeys are made, the
    battery may need extra charging. This can
    be done with a battery charger or by taking
    the car for a long run.

    WARNING
    • When working on the battery, highly
    explosive gas can build up. A spark
    could ignite this gas that collects
    around the battery.
    Therefore, always avoid sparks and
    open flames in the vicinity of the
    battery.
    • The battery contains corrosive sulphuric acid. Always wear a face mask or
    goggles when working on the battery.
    • If battery acid gets into the eyes or
    splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
    the affected area liberally with water.
    If acid gets into the eyes or a large
    quantity makes contact with the skin,
    seek medical help.
    • Battery posts, terminals and related
    accessories contain lead and lead
    compounds. Wash your hands after
    handling

    213

    If the battery is not being charged while the
    engine is running, the following message
    will appear on the SID:
    Battery not charging.
    Make a safe stop.

    Checking the battery electrolyte level.
    Level correct if level indicator dark.
    Battery should be changed if indicator is
    light
    Check the charge state and electrolyte level
    of the battery regularly.

    NOTICE
    A discharged battery can freeze and fracture. Batteries should therefore always be
    stored away from sub-zero temperatures.

    Check the drive belt (see page 216). If the
    belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,
    the battery may not be charged and the A/C
    compressor may not work.



  • Page 214

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 214 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    214

    Car care

    Always connect the positive (red) cable to
    the battery’s positive (+) terminal, and the
    negative (black) cable to the negative (-)
    terminal of the battery. Always disconnect
    both battery leads when boost charging the
    battery.

    NOTICE
    • If boost charging never use anything
    but a 12-volt charger, see page 198.
    • Do not connect the battery terminals, + and –, incorrectly.
    • Serious damage can occur to the car’s
    electrical system if a battery or alternator lead is disconnected while the
    engine is running.
    • Exercise special care when removing
    and fitting the positive (+) cable so as
    not to damage the battery disconnect
    switch.
    A car with standard equipment specifications and a fully charged battery can be left
    for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
    charge for starting. If extra equipment is fitted, such as a mobile phone, the charge
    may only be sufficient for about 15 days.

    Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to
    unlock the battery cover.

    Battery bracket



  • Page 215

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 215 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Battery disconnect switch 3
    WARNING
    If the battery disconnect switch has
    tripped, do not reset it until you have visually inspected the car’s electrical system.
    If there are visible signs of damage, have
    the car checked at a workshop before
    resetting the disconnect switch. We
    recommend that you contact an authorised Saab workshop.
    A collision could cause a short circuit in the
    alternator or starter motor. A disconnect
    switch by the battery’s positive terminal cuts
    off the battery from the alternator and starter
    motor when the airbags and seatbelt pretensioners are detonated.

    NOTICE
    Exercise special care when removing and
    fitting the positive (+) cable so as not to
    damage the battery disconnect switch.

    Battery disconnect switch with reset
    button

    215



  • Page 216

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 216 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    216

    Car care

    Drive belt
    WARNING
    • Keep hands and clothing clear of drive
    belts when engine is running.
    • Always stop the engine before
    inspecting the drive belt.
    • The radiator fan is electric and can
    start even when the engine is
    switched off.

    Drive belt, 4-cyl engine

    NOTICE
    Serious damage can be done to the car’s
    electrical system if an alternator lead is
    disconnected while the engine is running.
    The alternator is situated on the right-hand
    side of the engine. It is driven by a
    poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.

    A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can
    result in:
    • no charge to the battery
    • no A/C compressor function.
    The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
    automatically by the belt tensioner.

    Drive belt, V6 engine



  • Page 217

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 217 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    217

    Wipers and washers
    Wiper blades
    Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
    If poor wiper performance is experienced,
    clean the windshield with washer fluid. This
    is particularly important if the car has been
    through an automatic car wash, as these
    sometimes leave a wax coating on the windshield.
    If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
    fit new blades.

    Change of wiper blades, windshield

    Windshield
    1 Press in the catch (1).
    2 Pull the complete wiper blade downwards so that it comes away from the
    wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out
    from the arm.

    Change of wiper blades, rear window,
    SportCombi

    Rear window, SportCombi
    1 Detach the blade from the arm by pressing on the mounting for the blade from
    below.
    2 Fit the new blade by pressing the shaft
    of the blade into the arm's mounting.
    The washer jet, which is located next to the
    high-mounted brake light, is not adjustable.



  • Page 218

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 218 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    218

    Car care

    Washers
    WARNING
    Take care not to spill washer fluid concentrate onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid
    concentrate can contain flammable ingredients such as alcohol.
    The reservoir capacity is approx. 6 qts.
    (5.8 litres).
    When the washer fluid level drops below
    1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
    equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
    to prioritize the windshield. The following
    message is displayed on the SID:
    Washer fluid level low.
    Refill.
    Headlight washers are only available on
    certain markets.
    Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water
    as recommended by the table on
    the packaging to reduce the risk of freezing
    and to ensure effective cleaning (see also
    page 102).

    Washer fluid reservoir

    Washer jets
    The washer jets, which are adjustable, can
    be cleaned with a pin if necessary.



  • Page 219

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 219 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    219

    Car care

    Changing bulbs
    WARNING
    Before changing a bulb in the engine
    bay, switch off the engine to avoid the
    danger of fingers and hands being
    injured by moving parts.
    The radiator fan can cut in even when the
    engine is switched off.

    NOTICE
    Switch off the ignition before changing a
    bulb, to avoid possible short-circuiting.

    Autochecking of lights

    Wrong bulb fitted

    The bulbs that are most important from the
    point of view of traffic safety are monitored
    by the car’s electrical system. If one of these
    bulbs should fail, a message will be displayed on the SID.

    If a low or main beam bulb of too high a
    rating is fitted, a bulb failure message will be
    shown on the SID (a too high wattage bulb
    can damage the reflector).

    Example of SID message:

    If the following message is displayed but the
    bulb shines, it is most likely that an incorrect
    bulb has been fitted.

    Left low beam failure.
    Right high beam failure.
    The following bulbs are not checked: parking lights, front fog lights, reversing lights,
    license plate lighting, side marker lights and
    side direction indicators.
    SportCombi
    The tail lights and brake lights consist of
    LEDs. If approx. 3/4 of the LEDs on one side
    are broken then this is indicated in the SID.
    If a stop light bulb fails
    Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the
    adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
    ensure traffic safety. Change the broken
    bulb when possible.
    All rear light bulbs are of the same type and
    rated 21 W, with the exception of the license
    plate lighting which is rated 5 W.

    Note:
    When changing bulbs, fit the same type
    of bulb (e.g. Long-Life) as that removed.

    Headlight aiming, page 269.



  • Page 220

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 220 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Xenon headlight, low beam 3
    WARNING
    Xenon headlights are high tension. All
    work on xenon headlights, including
    changing bulbs, must be carried out by
    dealer personnel.
    Xenon headlights produce roughly two
    times as much light as halogen bulbs and
    have a significantly longer service life.
    The lamp units consist of a gas discharge
    lamp containing xenon. When the lights are
    switched on a very high voltage activates
    the xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full
    intensity.

    220

    Cars with xenon headlights have automatic
    levelling. The levelling system is comprised
    of two sensors, one on the front suspension
    and one on the rear suspension, and a
    control unit by the engine bay fuse box.
    Headlight alignment is adjusted automatically to the car’s load to prevent dazzling
    drivers in oncoming traffic.
    If a fault is detected in the system, the following message will be displayed on the
    SID:
    Headlight levelling
    malfunction.

    We recommend you to contact a Saab
    dealer to have a xenon headlight changed



  • Page 221

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 221 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    221

    Car care

    Retainers on the battery cover

    Low beam, halogen
    Left-hand side
    1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
    2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
    in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
    3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
    4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
    5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
    see page 240.
    Both sides
    1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
    2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
    from the reflector.
    3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
    Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
    it locks.

    Changing the low beam bulb
    4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
    Left-hand side
    5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
    6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
    7 Refit the battery cover.

    NOTICE
    Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
    damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
    not designed to cope with higher wattages.



  • Page 222

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 222 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Retainers on the battery cover

    High beam, halogen
    Left-hand side
    1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
    2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
    in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
    3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
    4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
    5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
    see page 240.
    Both sides
    1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
    2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
    from the reflector.
    3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
    Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
    it locks.

    222

    Changing the high beam bulb
    4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
    Left-hand side
    5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
    6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
    7 Refit the battery cover.

    NOTICE
    Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
    damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
    not designed to cope with higher wattages.



  • Page 223

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 223 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    223

    Both sides:
    1 Remove the cover from the rear of the
    headlight.
    2 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
    unit.
    3 Fit the new bulb.
    4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.

    Parking lights
    The parking light bulb is located in the same
    reflector as the main beam bulb.
    Left-hand side:
    1 Lift aside the hose running along the
    side of the battery cover.
    2 Release the two retainers on the battery
    cover and remove the cover.
    3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
    4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
    of the battery box.

    Left-hand side:
    5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
    battery box.
    6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
    7 Refit the battery cover and hose.

    Front turn signal bulbs
    Left-hand side:
    1 Lift aside the hose running along the
    side of the battery cover.
    2 Release the two retainers on the battery
    cover and remove the cover.
    3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
    4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
    of the battery box.



  • Page 224

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 224 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    224

    Car care

    Both sides:
    1 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
    Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
    and withdraw it.
    2 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
    Press in the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
    3 Fit the new bulb.
    4 To facilitate fitting, look in through the
    headlight lens when fitting the bulb.
    Check that the new bulb is firmly seated.
    Left-hand side:
    5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
    battery box.
    6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
    7 Refit the battery cover and hose.

    Side-mounted turn signal bulbs
    1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its
    rear end can be pulled out.
    2 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
    and withdraw it from the lamp fitting.
    Change the bulb.
    3 To fit, engage the two catches on the
    rear edge of the lamp fitting with the
    edge of the opening. Then press in the
    front edge of the lamp fitting so that the
    groove in the spring engages the plastic
    edge.



  • Page 225

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 225 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    225

    1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.
    Lower the air shield.
    2 Remove the protective cover. Release
    the two spring clips securing the bulb.
    3 Unplug the connector.
    4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the
    glass part of the bulb with your fingers.
    The height of the beam can be adjusted
    using a screwdriver inserted through the
    hole in the lower grille adjacent to the lens.

    Front fog lights 3
    WARNING
    • Never crawl under a car that is
    supported only by a jack. Always use
    axle stands.
    • Refer to the information on jacks on
    pages 257 and 258.

    Side marker lights
    1 Slide the lens rearward so that its front
    part can be pulled out.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 When refitting, make sure that the
    groove in the spring engages the plastic
    edge of the bumper trim.



  • Page 226

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 226 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    226

    Car care

    Taillights, Sport Sedan

    Taillights, Convertible

    Taillights, SportCombi

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    Turn signals
    Taillights/stop lights
    Reversing lights
    Rear fog light (left-hand side)
    High-mounted stop light

    Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the
    adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
    ensure traffic safety. Change the broken
    bulb when possible.

    Turn signals
    Taillights/stop lights
    Reversing lights
    Rear fog light (left-hand side)
    High-mounted stop light

    Turn signals
    Taillights/stop lights
    Reversing lights
    Rear fog light (left-hand side)
    High-mounted stop light



  • Page 227

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 227 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Stop lights, taillights and turn
    signal bulbs, Sport Sedan
    1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the
    lights.
    Right-hand side: Unlock the plastic rivet
    by depressing the centre no more than
    3 mm. Take hold of the collar of the rivet
    and pull it out. Refer also to page 228.
    2 Lift the plastic lug on the lamp housing
    that secures the bulb holder.
    3 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
    unit from the lamp housing. Change the
    bulb.
    4 Refit the bulb holder. Press the bulb
    holder home so that the plastic lug
    snaps into place.

    Stop lights, taillights and turn
    signal bulbs, Convertible
    1 Remove the cover.
    2 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
    the broken bulb.The bulb holder has a
    bayonet fitting.
    3 Change the bulb.
    4 Refit the bulb holder and cover.

    227

    Turn signals, reversing light and
    rear fog light, SportCombi
    1 Remove the cover.
    2 Remove the bulb holder with the broken
    bulb. The bulb holder has a bayonet
    fitting.
    3 Fit the new bulb.
    4 Refit the bulb holder and the cover.



  • Page 228

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 228 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    228

    Car care

    Changing bulbs

    Reversing lights and rear fog
    light, Sport Sedan
    Removing the trunk lid trim
    1 Remove the two screws securing the
    grab handle to the inside of the trunk lid.
    2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
    the center of each rivet. Pull out the
    rivets by taking hold of the rivet’s collar.
    You can use the button on the handle of the
    screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
    the rivets.

    1 Press down the plastic lug on the bulb
    holder.
    2 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
    unit from the lamp housing. Change the
    bulb.
    3 Refit the bulb holder. Press the lug so
    that it snaps into place.
    To refit the trunk lid trim
    1 Withdraw the center of the rivets.
    2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
    3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
    pressing the center buttons in until flush
    with the collar.

    Reversing lights and rear fog
    lights, Convertible
    Removing the trunk lid trim
    1 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
    the centre of each rivet no more than
    3 mm. Pull out the rivets by taking hold
    of the rivet’s collar.
    You can use the button on the handle of the
    screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
    the rivets.



  • Page 229

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 229 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    229

    Changing bulbs
    1 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
    the broken bulb. The bulb holder has a
    bayonet fitting.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Refit the bulb holder.
    To refit the trunk lid trim
    1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.
    2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
    3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
    pressing the center buttons in until flush
    with the collar.

    Dome light, front, Sport Sedan
    and SportCombi
    1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Insert the guide lugs on the front edge of
    the lens and press the lens home.

    Dome light, rear, Sport Sedan
    and SportCombi
    1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
    ease out the trailing end first, and then
    both sides of the front edge.
    2 Fit the new bulb.



  • Page 230

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 230 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    230

    Car care

    Dome light, Convertible
    1 Pull down the rear edge of the light
    fitting.
    2 If the center bulb needs replacing, open
    the hatch over the bulbs. Pull the bulb
    out of the bulb holder.
    If one of the outer bulbs needs replacing,
    turn the light fitting round. Change the
    bulb from the reverse of the lighting
    fitting. The bulb has a bayonet fitting.
    3 Position the front edge of the light fitting
    and press the fitting up towards the
    windscreen rail.

    Hatch opened for replacement of centre
    bulb

    Reverse side of the light fitting. The
    arrows mark the outer bulbs



  • Page 231

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 231 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    License plate lighting
    1 Undo the two screws and remove the
    lens.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Make sure the seal on the lens is
    correctly seated.
    4 Refit the lens and tighten the two
    screws.

    Glove box lighting 3
    1 Remove the lamp housing using a short
    screwdriver.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Insert the connector side first when refitting the lamp.

    231

    Trunk lighting, Sport Sedan
    The lamp fitting is located under the parcel
    shelf.
    1 Remove the lamp fitting by pulling down
    one end.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Insert the connector side first when refitting the lamp.



  • Page 232

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 232 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    232

    Car care

    Trunk lighting, Convertible
    1 Remove the lamp in the rear end first.
    2 Change the bulb.
    3 Insert the connector side first when refitting the lamp.

    Trunk lighting, SportCombi
    1 Pull the lamp housing forward and lift it
    out at the front.
    2 Fit the new bulb. The bulb is secured in
    the holder.
    3 Start by inserting in the front edge of the
    lamp housing and then pressing in the
    rear edge.

    Courtesy/floor lighting 3
    1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting
    using a screwdriver.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Insert the connector side first when refitting the lamp.

    Other bulbs
    If any other bulbs need changing, we recommend that you visit a Saab dealer.



  • Page 233

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 233 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    233

    Car care
    Bulb table
    No. Designation Wattage
    1

    H7

    55

    Headlight

    2

    H3

    55

    Front fog lights 3

    3

    P21W

    21

    Taillights; rear fog light; brake lights;
    reversing lights

    4

    PY21W

    21

    Direction indicator, front/rear

    5

    R10W

    10

    Rear dome lighting; courtesy
    lighting 3; glove box lighting; trunk
    lighting, Convertible

    6

    R5W

    5

    License plate lighting; trunk lighting,
    Sport Sedan

    7

    T4W

    4

    Reading light, rear

    8

    WY5W/W5W

    5

    Side-mounted turn signal (yellow);
    parking lights; front dome lighting

    NOTICE
    Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
    could damage the wiring harness and electronics.



  • Page 234

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 234 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    234

    Car care

    Fuses
    WARNING
    To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
    fire breaking out in the electrical system,
    the following should be heeded:
    • We recommend that you allways
    consult an Saab dealer before modifying or adding any electrical equipment. Failure to do so can result in the
    electrical system being damaged.
    • Never replace a fuse with one having
    a higher rating than specified (see
    page 236). The color of the fuse indicates its amperage.
    • If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
    have the electrical system checked by
    a workshop. We recommend that you
    contact a Saab dealer.
    • If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
    there is a major fault in the electrical
    system. Have the car checked without
    delay. We recommend that you
    contact a Saab dealer.

    The fuses are housed in three fuse panels:
    one behind a hatch on the left-hand end of
    the dash, one in the engine bay (additional
    small unit in front of battery) and one on the
    left-hand side of the trunk. There is space
    for spare fuses in the hatch on the left-hand
    end of the dash.

    Sound fuse / Blown fuse
    To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
    from the panel. If the filament is broken, the
    fuse has blown.



  • Page 235

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 235 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Some fuses and relays may be fitted but not
    connected to the car’s electrical system.

    235

    MAXI fuses
    The car also has a number of large fuses
    known as MAXI fuses. These are designed
    to protect the car’s electrical system from
    being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a
    number of electrical circuits and functions
    and therefore has a higher rating (amperage) than the standard fuses. No spare
    MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.

    NOTICE
    Fuse panel in end of dash
    A special tool for removing fuses is provided
    on the hatch on the left-hand end of the
    dash. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,
    squeeze and remove the fuse.

    If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major fault
    in the electrical system. Have the car
    checked. We recommend that you
    contact a Saab dealer.



  • Page 236

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 236 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21

    Fuse panel in end of fascia
    No. Amp. Function
    1
    15
    Steering wheel lock
    2
    5
    Steering column unit; ignition switch
    3
    10
    Hands-free 3
    4
    10
    Main instrument unit; automatic climate control
    (ACC) 3
    5
    7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock
    (automatic transmission)
    6
    7.5 Brake light switch
    7
    20
    Dash fuse panel; fuel filler door
    8
    30
    Control module in passenger front door
    9
    10
    Dash fuse panel
    10
    30
    Trailer socket 3; electrical socket in storage compartment between seats 3
    11
    10
    Data link connection (diagnostics)

    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27

    15
    10
    20
    30
    5
    7.5
    7.5

    236

    Interior lighting incl. glove box
    Accessories
    Amplifier 2, Sound System 3
    Control module in driver’s door
    Passenger Sensing System
    Headlight levelling switch 3
    Hands-free 3; brake light switch; manual climate
    control 3; clutch pedal switch
    30
    Cigarette lighter 3
    40
    Cabin fan
    7.5 Airbag control module
    5
    Yaw sensor (cars with ESP® )
    -

    -



  • Page 237

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 237 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    237

    Car care
    Trunk fuse panel, left-hand side

    Trunk fuse panel, Sport Sedan

    No. Amp. Function
    1–5 MAXI 6 30 Control module in left rear door
    7 30 Control module in right rear door
    8 20 Trailer 3
    9
    10 30 Left-hand brake light; rear right turn signal; right taillight; right reversing light; high-mounted brake light;
    trailer lights
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15 15 Seat heating, left seat 3
    16 15 Seat heating, right seat 3
    17
    7.5 Autodimming rearview mirror 3; rain sensor 3
    18 15 Moonroof 3
    19
    20
    7.5 XM-radio 3, TMC-tuner 3
    21
    7.5 Saab Parking Assistance (SPA) 3; control module in
    rear doors; dome light (Convertible)
    22 30 Radio 3; navigation 3
    23
    24 10 Movement sensor 3; tilt sensor 3; dome light (Convertible)
    25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory 3



  • Page 238

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 238 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    26

    30

    27

    10

    28
    29

    15
    -

    Right-hand stop light; rear left turn signal; left taillight;
    rear fog light; left reversing light; license plate lighting; trunk lighting; trailer lights
    Convertible: Lumbar support, electrically adjustable
    front seat 3
    Telematics 3
    -

    Trunk fuse panel, Convertible

    238



  • Page 239

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 239 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    239

    Car care

    Fuse panel in engine bay
    No. Amp. Function
    1
    2 10 Engine control module; automatic transmission control module 3
    3 20 Horn
    4 10 Engine control module; battery disconnect switch 3
    5
    - 6 10 Selector lever, automatic transmission 3; clutch pedal
    switch
    7
    8 5 Relay for vacuumpump (brake system) 3
    9
    10
    11
    12 10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3

    13
    14
    15
    16

    30
    30

    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    30
    30
    20
    10
    30
    20
    20
    30

    27 MAXI
    –37

    Washer fluid pump, headlights 3
    Front right parking light; front right turn signal; left and
    right side turn signal; right high beam; left low beam;
    front left fog light 3
    Windshield wiper motor, low speed
    Windshield wiper motor, high speed
    Parking heater; auxiliary heater 3
    Headlight levelling 3
    Washer fluid pump, windshield
    Flash-to-pass
    Amplifier, sound system II 3
    Front left turn signal; front left parking light; front right
    fog light 3; right low beam; left high beam



  • Page 240

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 240 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Relays
    R 1 Washer fluid pump, windshield
    R 2 R 3 R 4 R 5 Flash-to-pass
    R 6 Horn
    R 7 R 8 Starter motor
    R 9 Windshield wipers ON/OFF
    R10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3
    R11 Ignition +15
    R12 Windshield wipers, high/low speed
    R13 R14 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3
    R15 R16 -

    240

    Fuse panel in front of battery 3
    No.

    Amp. Function
    Air pump, secondary air 3
    20
    Fuel pump; preheated oxygen sensors (lambda
    probe)
    3
    10
    A/C compressor
    4
    30
    Main relay
    1
    2

    Relays
    1 2 A/C-compressor
    3 Preheated oxygen sensors (lambda probe)
    4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injectors)



  • Page 241

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 241 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Tires

    Inflation - Tire Pressure

    Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
    tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
    you ever have questions about your tire
    warranty and where to obtain service, see
    your Saab Warranty and Service Record
    Booklet for details.

    WARNING
    Poor maintained and improperly used
    tires are dangerous.
    • Overloading your tires can cause
    overheating as a result of too much
    friction. You could have an blow-out
    and a serious accident. See “” on
    page 251.
    • Underinflated tires pose the same
    danger as overloaded tires. The
    resulting accident could cause serious
    injury. Check all tires frequently to
    maintain the recommended pressure.
    Tire pressure should be checked
    when your tires are cold.
    • Overinflated tires are more likely to be
    cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
    impact – such as when you hit a
    pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
    • Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
    your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
    have been damaged, replace them.

    The Tire-Loading Information label shows
    the correct inflation pressures for your tires
    when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
    or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

    Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that
    underinflation or overinflation is all
    right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have
    enough air (underinflation), you can get
    the following:







    Too much flexing
    Too much heat
    Tire overloading
    Bad wear
    Bad handling
    Bad fuel economy

    If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:





    Unusual wear
    Bad handling
    Rough ride
    Needless damage from road hazards

    241

    Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
    load and speed of the car (see page 292).
    The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
    i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
    the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
    increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
    during highway driving) by approximately
    4 psi (28 kPa). When the temperature of the
    tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pressure will change 2 psi (14 kPa).
    Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
    tires are hot when you check them, only
    increase the pressure, if necessary.



  • Page 242

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 242 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    242

    Car care

    High speed operation
    WARNING
    Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
    (160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
    strain on tires.
    Sustained high-speed driving causes
    excessive heat build up and can cause
    sudden tire failure. You could have a
    crash and you or others could be killed.
    Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
    operation. When speed limits and road
    conditions are such that a vehicle can be
    driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
    are rated for high speed operation, in
    excellent condition, and set to the correct
    cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle
    load.

    If you’ll be driving at high speeds, speeds of
    100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is
    legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the
    maximum inflation pressure shown on the
    tire sidewall, or to 35 psi (244 kPa), whichever is lower. See the example below.
    When you end this high-speed driving,
    return to the cold inflation pressure shown
    on the Tire and Loading Information label.
    See on page 251.

    How to Check

    Example:

    Tire Inspection and Rotation

    You’ll find maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
    letters near the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load 690 kg
    (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press

    Tires should be rotated every 10,000 miles
    (16 000 km).

    For this example, you would set the inflation
    pressure for high-speed driving at 35 psi
    (244 kPa).

    When to check
    Check your tires once a month or more.
    Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
    should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

    Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
    check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
    tires are properly inflated simply by looking
    at them. Radial tires may look properly
    inflated even when they’re underinflated.
    Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
    valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
    keeping out dirt and moisture.

    Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
    your tires as soon as possible and check
    wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
    tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
    New Tires” on page 243 and “Wheel
    Replacement” on page 247 for more information.
    The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
    more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important.
    When rotating your tires, always use the
    correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
    rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
    right rear. Right rear to left front.
    Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
    tire rotation.
    After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
    front and rear inflation pressures as shown
    on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make



  • Page 243

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 243 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See page 258.

    WARNING
    Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
    which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
    become loose after a time. The wheel
    could come off and cause an accident.
    When you change a wheel, remove any
    rust or dirt from places where the wheel
    attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
    you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
    this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
    brush later, if you need to, to get all the
    rust or dirt off. See “Changing a tire” on
    page 257.

    243

    Flat spotting

    When It Is Time for New Tires

    All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
    or when the car is driven hard. After the car
    has been parked with hot tires and the tires
    have cooled down, a flat spot can form in the
    tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
    The same can occur if the car has not been
    moved for a long time.

    One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
    to check the treadwear indicators, which will
    appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
    (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

    Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
    felt through the steering wheel, similar to
    that experienced when the wheels need balancing.

    • You can see the indicators at three or
    more places around the tire.
    • You can see cord or fabric showing
    through the tire’s rubber.
    • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
    snagged deep enough to show cord or
    fabric.
    • The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
    • The tire has a puncture, cut or other
    damage that can’t be repaired well
    because of the size or location of the
    damage.

    Flat spots of this type disappear once the
    tires get hot again, usually after 10–15 miles
    (20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed. If
    the outdoor temperature is low it takes a
    longer distance.

    You need a new tire if any of the following
    statements are true:



  • Page 244

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 244 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    244

    Car care
    Buying New Tires
    To find out what kind and size of tires you
    need, look at the Tire-Loading Information
    label.
    Before changing to wheels/tires of another
    size, we recommend that you contact an
    authorised Saab workshop regarding
    acceptable options. See also page 290
    Wheels/tires combinations that are not
    approved by Saab can negatively affect the
    car’s directional stability, steering and braking in both wet and dry conditions.

    Treadwear indicator

    Treadwear indicators
    The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
    form of smooth, treadless strips across the
    width, which become visible when only
    2/32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as
    the indicators become visible, new tires
    should be fitted without delay.
    Make sure you are familiar with the legal
    limit for minimum tread depth in your
    country and also any regulations governing the use of winter (snow) tires.

    The wheels and tires have been carefully
    matched to the characteristics of the car and
    play a key role in its outstanding roadholding and handling.
    Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
    combination will work in the best possible
    way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
    To ensure that the speedometer is as accurate as possible it should be reprogrammed
    if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
    Contact a Saab dealer.
    Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
    tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
    tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
    tires on the same axle have the same
    amount of tread.
    Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
    standing upright.



  • Page 245

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 245 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    245

    Uniform Tire Quality Grading
    NOTICE
    Wide wheels and tires with side walls that
    are too low can:
    • be damaged in potholes, etc.
    • cause springs, shock absorbers and
    wheel bearings and body mountings
    to be overloaded.
    • affect the function of the Electronic
    Stability Program (ESP® ).
    The speed and load limits of the tires
    must not be exceeded; see page 250.
    Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted
    on the Saab 9-3 for reasons above. The
    permissible offset is 1.61 inch (41 mm).

    WARNING
    Mixing tires could cause you to lose
    control while driving. If you mix tires of
    different sizes or types (radial and biasbelted tires), the vehicle may not handle
    properly, and you could have a crash.
    Using tires of different sizes may also
    cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
    use the same size and type tires on all
    wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
    compact spare temporarily, it was developed for use on your vehicle. See
    “Compact spare” on page 254.

    WARNING
    If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
    the wheel rim flanges could develop
    cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
    and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
    a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
    wheels on your vehicle.

    Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
    Treadwear 200 Traction AA
    Temperature A
    The following information relates to the
    system developed by the United States
    National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
    applies only to vehicles sold in the United
    States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not
    apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
    space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
    tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
    inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
    While the tires available on General Motors
    passenger cars and light trucks may vary
    with respect to these grades, they must also
    conform to federal safety requirements and
    additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.



  • Page 246

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 246 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    246

    Car care

    Treadwear

    Temperature – A, B, C

    The treadwear grade is a comparative
    rating based on the wear rate of the tire
    when tested under controlled conditions on
    a specified government test course. For
    example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
    and a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
    actual conditions of their use, however, and
    may depart significantly from the norm due
    to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics
    and climate.

    The temperature grades are A (the highest),
    B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
    to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
    conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
    test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
    cause the material of the tire to degenerate
    and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
    grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must
    meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
    Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
    represent higher levels of performance on
    the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
    required by law.

    Traction – AA, A, B, C
    The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
    are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces
    of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
    may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
    is based on straight-ahead braking traction
    tests, and does not include acceleration,
    cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
    characteristics.

    Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
    is established for a tire that is properly
    inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
    speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
    either separately or in combination, can
    cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

    Wheel Alignment and Tire
    Balance
    The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
    and balanced carefully at the factory to give
    you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
    Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you
    notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may
    need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
    vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
    your wheels may need to be rebalanced.



  • Page 247

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 247 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Wheel Replacement
    Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
    badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
    coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
    wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
    leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
    wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
    See your dealer if any of these conditions
    exist.
    Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
    need.
    Each new wheel should have the same
    load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
    offset and be mounted the same way as the
    one it replaces.
    If you need to replace any of your wheels,
    wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only
    with new Saab original equipment parts.
    This way, you will be sure to have the right
    wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
    vehicle.

    WARNING
    Using the wrong replacement wheels,
    wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
    can be dangerous. It could affect the
    braking and handling of your vehicle,
    make your tires lose air and make you
    lose control. You could have a collision in
    which you or others could be injured.
    Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts
    and wheel nuts for replacement.

    Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
    problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
    chain clearance to the body and chassis.
    See “Changing a tire” on page 257.

    WARNING
    When fitting just one new pair of tires,
    these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
    as these are more critical to the directional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
    or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
    should therefore be moved to the front.

    247

    Used Replacement Wheels

    WARNING
    Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
    dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
    used or how far it’s been driven. It could
    fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
    have to replace a wheel, use a new GM
    original equipment wheel.



  • Page 248

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 248 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    248

    Car care

    Tire Chains
    WARNING
    If your vehicle has 235/45 R17 size tires,
    don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough
    clearance.
    Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
    proper amount of clearance can cause
    damage to the brakes, suspension or
    other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
    the tire chains could cause you to lose
    control of your vehicle and you or others
    may be injured in a crash.

    Notice: If your vehicle does not have
    235/45R17 size tires, use tire chains only
    where legal and only when you must.
    Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains. Install them on the
    front tires and tighten them as tightly as
    possible with the ends securely
    fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
    chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
    can hear the chains contacting your
    vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the
    contact continues, slow down until it
    stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
    wheels with chains on will damage your
    vehicle.

    If a Tire Goes Flat
    It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while
    you’re driving, especially if you maintain
    your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
    it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
    if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
    a few tips about what to expect and what to
    do:
    If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
    drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
    Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
    grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
    a stop well out of the traffic lane.

    Use another type of traction device only if
    its manufacturer recommends it for use
    on your vehicle and tire size combination
    and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
    damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
    readjust or remove the device if it’s
    contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin
    your wheels.

    A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts
    much like a skid and may require the same
    correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear
    blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
    steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
    It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
    still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off
    the road if possible.

    If you do find traction devices that will fit,
    install them on the front tires.

    If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
    use your jacking equipment to change a flat
    tire safely.



  • Page 249

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 249 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Tire Sidewall Labeling
    Useful information about a tire is molded
    into it´s sidewall.
    Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of
    letters and numbers used to define a particular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description.
    Department of Transportation (DOT):
    The Department of Transportation (DOT)
    code indicates that the tire is in compliance
    with the U.S. Department of Transportation
    Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
    Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT code are
    the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
    TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
    code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
    of the tire.
    Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
    number of plies in the sidewall and under
    the tread.

    Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
    Tire manufacturers are required to grade
    tires based on the performance factors:
    treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. For more information see “Uniform
    Tire Quality Grading” on page 245.
    Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.
    For information on recommended tire pressure see “Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires” on page 292 and “” on
    page 251.

    249

    Tire Size
    The following illustration shows an example
    of a typical passenger car tire size.
    215 / 55 R

    16 93

    H

    |

    |

    |

    |

    |

    |

    a

    b

    c

    d

    e

    f

    a
    b
    c
    d
    e
    f

    Tire Width
    Aspect Ratio
    Belt Rating
    Rim diameter
    Load range
    Speed rating

    Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters
    from sidewall to sidewall.



  • Page 250

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 250 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    250

    Car care

    Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect
    ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illustration, it would mean that the tire´s sidewall
    is 55% as high as it is wide.
    Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
    the type of ply construction in the tire. The
    letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
    letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B” means beltedbias ply construction.
    Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
    inches.
    Load range: The load range represents the
    load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
    Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a
    tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
    range from “A” to “Z”.

    Tire markings
    An example of the meaning of the different
    markings in a tire size is given below for a
    tire size of 225/45 R17 94H:
    225 Tire section width, mm
    45 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
    as a percentage of the section
    width
    R Radial ply
    17 Wheel rim diameter 17 in at bead
    seats
    94 Tire load index
    H Speed rating
    Tire load indices
    91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
    (615 kg)
    93 Max. 1433 lbs. (650 kg)
    94 Max. 1477 lbs. (670 kg)
    95 Max. 1521 lbs. (690 kg)
    97 Max. 1609 lbs. (730 kg)

    Speed ratings
    Q Tire approved for speeds up to
    100 mph (160 km/h)
    S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)
    T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
    H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
    V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)
    W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)
    Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)



  • Page 251

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 251 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Loading Your Vehicle

    251

    Tire Terminology and Definitions
    Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
    tire pressing outward on each square inch of
    the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
    per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

    TIN-code
    a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
    b Tire Size
    c Tire Type Code
    d Date of Manufacture

    This label can only be found on vehicles
    sold in the U.S.
    Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire
    information label in the glove box, see
    page 293.
    This is an example of what your vehicle´s
    Tire-Loading Information/Certification label
    might look like. It is located on the B-pillar
    and shows how much weight your vehicle
    may properly carry. The label tells you the
    proper size, and recommended inflation
    pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It
    also gives you important information about
    the number of people that can be in your
    vehicle and the total weight that you can
    carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
    Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of
    all occupants, cargo and all nonfactoryinstalled options.

    Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories, for
    example, automatic transmission, power
    steering, power brakes, power windows,
    power seats, radio and air conditioning.
    Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s
    height to its width.
    Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
    located between the plies and the tread.
    Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
    Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
    ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
    alternate angles substantially less than 90
    degrees to the centerline of the tread.
    Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air
    pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
    square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
    a tire has built up heat from driving. See
    “Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 241.
    Curb weight: This means the weight of a
    motor vehicle with standard and optional
    equipment including the maximum capacity
    of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
    and cargo.



  • Page 252

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 252 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    252

    Car care

    DOT Markings: A code molded into the
    sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
    compliance with the U.S. Department of
    Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
    Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
    tire manufacturer, production plant, brand
    and date of production.
    GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see “”
    on page 251.
    GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
    the front axle, see “” on page 281.
    GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
    the rear axle, see “” on page 251.
    Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
    an asymmetrical tire that must always face
    outward when mounted on a vehicle.
    Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air
    pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
    Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used
    on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
    passenger vehicles.
    Load Index: An assigned number ranging
    from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
    carrying capacity of a tire.

    Maximum Load rating: The load rating for
    a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
    pressure for that tire.
    Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The
    sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options
    weight.
    Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: The maximum cold inflation pressure
    to which a tire may be inflated.
    Normal occupant weight: The number of
    occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “” on
    page 251.
    Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
    Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a
    asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
    that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and or model name molding on
    the other sidewall of the tire.
    Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
    passenger cars and some light duty trucks
    and multipurpose vehicles.

    Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer´s recommended tire inflation pressure shown on the tire placard, see
    “Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 241 and
    “” on page 251.
    Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
    the ply cords that extend to the beads are
    laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
    Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and
    tube assembly upon which the tire beads
    are seated.
    Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the
    tread and the bead.
    Speed rating: An alphanumeric code
    assigned to a tire indicating the maximum
    speed at which a tire can operate.
    Traction: The friction between the tire and
    the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
    Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
    sometimes called “wear bars”, that show
    across the tread of a tire when only
    2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is
    Time for New Tires” on page 243.



  • Page 253

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 253 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.
    UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire´s
    traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
    using government testing procedures. The
    rating are molded into the sidewall of the
    tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
    page 245.
    Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of
    designated seating positions multipled by
    150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
    load. See “” on page 251.
    Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load
    on an individual tire due to curb weight,
    accessory weight, occupant weight and
    cargo weight.
    Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
    attached to a vehicle showing original
    equipment tire size and the recommended
    cold inflation pressure. See “” on page 251.

    Steps for Determining Correct
    Load Limit
    1 Locate the statement “The
    combined weight of occupants and
    cargo should never exceed
    XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s
    placard.
    2 Determine the combined weight of
    the driver and passengers that will
    be riding in your vehicle.
    3 Substract the combined weight of
    the driver and passengers from
    XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
    4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
    load capacity. For example, if the
    “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
    there will be five 150 lb. passengers
    in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
    650 lbs.).

    253

    5 Determine the combined weight of
    luggage and cargo being loaded on
    the vehicle. That weight may not
    safely exceed the available cargo
    and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
    6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
    load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
    manual to determine how this
    reduces the available cargo and
    luggage load capacity of your vehicle.



  • Page 254

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 254 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    254

    Car care

    Winter tires
    Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
    winter climates where the majority of your
    driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
    tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
    maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
    dealer can advise you of to the correct size
    tire for your car (if different from the original
    size) and also supply Saab approved winter
    tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.

    Compact spare
    WARNING

    The spare tire, the tools and the jack with its
    crank are carried under a panel in the trunk.
    Fold the carpeting forward to ease access to
    the tools and spare tire.

    The spare tire or punctured tire must be
    stowed under the trunk floor, and secured
    in place with the retaining nut.

    The screwdriver handle has a “button” for
    removing plastic rivets. This type of rivet
    must be removed when changing the light
    bulb in the trunk lid (see page 228).

    Winter tires normally use a different speed
    rating compared to summer/all season tires.
    Make sure not to exceed the stated speed
    rating on the tires you use.

    The compact spare is light and easy to
    handle when changing the tire. Its use is
    only permitted when a standard tire has sustained a puncture. The maximum life of the
    tire is only just over 2,000 miles (3,500 km).

    Your Saab is equipped with a trip computer
    and you can use its “Speed warning” function, to monitor driving speed since you
    must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h), see
    page 90.

    Tire date code

    Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
    compact spare fitted.

    Tires should be regarded as perishable
    goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes
    progressively harder, and the roadholding
    ability of the tires diminishes. This is particularly true on winter tires.
    Tires have a code that specifies their date of
    manufacture. The first two digits denote the
    week number and the last two digits the year
    followed by a filled triangle.

    The tire pressure should be 60 psi
    (420 kPa). Put the punctured tire in the
    spare wheel well under the trunk floor.
    Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
    as soon as possible.



  • Page 255

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 255 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Driving with a compact wheel
    fitted
    WARNING
    • Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The
    tire can overheat affecting the car’s
    roadholding.
    • Tire pressure: refer to page 290.
    • The spare tire or punctured tire must
    be stowed under the trunk floor, and
    secured in place with the retaining nut.
    Observe the following when the compact
    spare tire is fitted:
    • The compact spare is light and easy to
    handle when changing a tire.
    • Do not drive further than necessary with
    the compact spare fitted - the maximum

    life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles
    (approx. 3,500 km).
    • Refit the standard tire as soon as possible.

    Tools under a panel in the trunk

    Important considerations when driving with
    a compact spare tire:

    NOTICE

    • The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
    • The car must not be driven with more than
    one compact spare tire at a time.
    • Avoid driving against the curb.
    • Do not use snow chains.
    • Do not fit the wheel cover - this would
    conceal the warning text.

    255

    To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a
    punctured tire, this can be temporarily
    placed outside up in the spare wheel well
    but only while driving to the closest workshop.
    As a general rule, all heavy loads must be
    well secured in the trunk (see page 139).



  • Page 256

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 256 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    256

    Car care

    SportCombi

    SportCombi with subwoofer



  • Page 257

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 257 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Changing a tire
    WARNING
    Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
    maintenance or repairs is dangerous
    without the appropriate safety equipment
    and training. The jack provided with your
    vehicle is designed only for changing a
    flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
    or others could be badly injured or killed if
    the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
    provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
    Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
    vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
    or fall on you or other people. You and
    they could be badly injured or even killed.
    Find a level place to change your tire. To
    help prevent the vehicle from moving:
    1 Set the parking brake firmly.
    2 If you have an automatic transmission, put the shift lever in PARK (P).
    For a manual transmission, leave the
    car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).
    3 Turn off the engine and do not restart
    while the vehicle is raised.
    4 Do not allow passengers to remain in
    the vehicle.

    257

    To be even more certain the vehicle won't
    move, you should put blocks at the front
    and rear of the tire farthest away from the
    one being changed. That would be the
    tire, on the other side, at the opposite end
    of the vehicle.

    • The jack should be stored correctly
    under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
    lies loose in the car, it could thrown
    forward and cause personal injury in
    the event of a crash or if the car rolls
    over.

    • The car jack is designed solely for use
    in changing a tire or fitting snow
    chains. It must not be used to
    support the car during repair work
    or servicing.

    • Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
    threads of the wheel bolts if the car has
    been driven for several years exclusively with alloy wheels.
    If steel wheels are being installed, the
    bolt hole threads in the brake hubs
    should be cleaned before the thinner
    steel wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not be possible to achieve the
    correct clamping force, despite tightening the wheel bolts to the correct
    torque.

    • Never crawl under a car that is
    supported only by a jack. Always use
    axle stands.
    • Raising your vehicle too high or with
    the jack improperly positioned can
    damage the vehicle and even make
    the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
    injury and vehicle damage, be sure to
    fit the jack lift head into the proper
    location before raising the vehicle, and
    raise the vehicle only far enough off
    the ground so there is enough room for
    the spare tire to fit (no more than
    25 mm or 1 inch clearance between
    the ground and the bottom of the tire).
    • Switch on the hazard warning lights if
    the car is on a road.



  • Page 258

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 258 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    258

    Car care

    When the car has to be lifted, the jack must
    be positioned at one of the four jacking
    points (front or rear) under the sill members.
    If a floor jack is used, the lifting plate must
    be positioned under the normal jacking
    points, see illustration. If the car is equipped
    with a towbar, the jack can also be placed
    under this.

    NOTICE
    Apply the jack only to the jacking points
    indicated on the body.
    1 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
    before placing it under the jacking point.
    Each jacking point is indicated by an
    arrow on the sill (see illustration).
    Make sure that the jack fully engages
    the jacking point in the underside of the
    sill member and that the entire foot of the
    jack is steady and flat on the ground.
    The jack must not stand on snow, ice or
    similar.
    Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift
    the car.

    Marking of jacking points

    Jacking points

    2 It is not necessary to remove the wheel
    cover.
    If, none the less, you wish to remove the
    wheel cover, take hold of the outer edge
    and pull it straight out.
    Remove the plastic wheel bolt covers.
    Loosen the wheel bolts half a turn.
    3 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
    the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and
    lift off the wheel.

    4 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
    surfaces between the wheel and brake
    disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
    wheel hub.
    5 Add a thin layer of grease on the bolts
    before fitting, see page 260. Fit the
    wheel and screw in the bolts in the
    sequence shown on page 260 (opposite
    pairs).
    Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
    and wheel to be seated correctly.
    6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
    bolts to torque in sequence as shown on
    page 260.
    Tightening torque:
    Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
    Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
    Refit the plastic wheel bolt covers.



  • Page 259

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 259 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Jacking points for floor jack

    NOTICE
    • Do not overtighten the bolts using a
    impact wrench: not only can this
    damage the wheels but it can also
    make it impossible to undo the bolts
    using the wheel wrench in the car’s
    toolkit.
    • When refitting a wheel cover, make
    sure that the valve protrudes through
    the marked recess in the wheel cover.

    Clean any rust or dirt from the contact surfaces between the wheel and brake disc.

    7 Retouching the wheel bolts after twenty
    or so miles.
    Tightening torque:
    Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
    Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
    We advise against using wheels with large
    ventilation slots in winter, as the brake components are then more exposed to slush,
    road salt and grit.
    If you fit wheels of a different dimension, the
    speedometer can be reprogrammed to
    ensure it is as accurate as possible. We recommend that you contact a Saab dealer.
    Driving with tire chains 3, see page 186

    259

    Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel
    hub.



  • Page 260

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 260 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    260

    Car care

    Safety belts
    WARNING
    If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
    belts, belt pretensioners and other associated components must be inspected.
    We recommend that you contact a Saab
    dealer.
    Never make any alterations or repairs to
    the safety belts yourself. We recommend
    that you contact a Saab dealer dealer.

    Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin
    layer of grease

    Check the function of the safety belts regularly as follows:
    • Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.
    The safety belt should lock and it should
    not be possible to withdraw it further.

    Tightening sequence, wheel bolts

    Check the anchorage points in the floor.
    They must not have suffered rust damage.
    If a belt is worn or has any fraying edges, it
    should be replaced.
    Safety belts must not come into contact with
    substances such as polishes, oil or chemicals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with
    warm water and a detergent or have them
    replaced.

    Upholstery and trim
    To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,
    door armrests and headlining, use a
    vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a
    clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using
    a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
    water.
    When using a stain remover, always work
    from the outside towards the centre to avoid
    leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
    remain, it can usually be removed using
    lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
    Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or
    thin oil, must be removed at once with an
    absorbent material, such as kitchen towelling. Then clean with a stain remover.
    White spirit is recommended for removing
    grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush
    may also be used.



  • Page 261

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 261 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    261

    Cleaning and caring for leather
    upholstery

    Textile carpeting

    Washing

    The principal reason for treating leather
    upholstery is to maintain its elegant appearance and to provide it with a protective film.
    Disco lour at ion caused by dust and wear
    mainly affects the lighter shades, although
    this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,
    the patina resulting from use is often considered desirable in leather. But if the leather is
    allowed to become too grubby, it can start to
    look shabby.

    Textile carpeting should be vacuum
    cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be
    cleaned using a brush or sponge and carpet
    shampoo.
    For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that
    are not earthed (grounded) must not be
    used out of doors.

    The bodywork must be washed frequently.
    When the car is new, the body should be
    washed by hand using plain cold water and
    a clean, soft brush through which the water
    flows. Automatic caresses should be
    avoided when the car is new.

    The leather upholstery should be cleaned
    and reconditioned twice a year in conjunction with spring and autumn inspections. In
    very warm, dry climates the leather may
    need more regular reconditioning. Use conventional leather care products. Follow the
    instructions on the packaging.
    Do not use harsh polishing agents, cleaning
    agents, sprays, coarse soap or hot water.

    Engine bay

    After 5–6 months the paintwork will have
    hardened. To facilitate cleaning, a suitable
    detergent can be added to the water, which
    should be lukewarm.

    The engine bay should be cleaned with an
    engine decreasing and rinsed with hot
    water. The headlights must be covered
    over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid
    spraying electrical components and connectors.

    Remove any bird droppings without delay,
    as these can discolor the paintwork and
    prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet
    paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a
    minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off
    the dirt.

    Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or solvent when carrying out repairs or maintenance. Saab recommends the use of environmentally-friendly decrescendos.

    Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit
    to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not
    use strong cleaners, as these can dry out
    the paintwork.



  • Page 262

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 262 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    262

    Car care

    NOTICE
    Do not use alcohol-based cleaners on the
    plastic lenses of the front or rear lights, as
    these can cause a crackling effect on the
    lenses.

    The underside of the car also needs washing regularly, and this should be done extra
    thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
    underside of the car by hand if the car is
    usually washed in an automatic car wash
    without special facilities for underbody
    cleaning.

    The door mirrors should be folded in
    before the car enters an automatic car
    wash.

    Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
    sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
    immediately after washing to avoid smears
    and streaks.

    Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
    Wet brake discs reduce the performance
    of the brakes.

    Clean the inside of window glass using a
    proprietary window cleaner. This is particularly important when the car is new, as
    upholstery and trim have a tendency to
    sweat a little at first.

    Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile
    phone, must be removed if the car goes
    through an automatic car wash.
    Cars with Saab Parking Assistance: Do
    not spray the sensors or closer than 8 in.
    (20 cm) to the sensors with a pressure
    washer, as this can damage them.

    Keep the glass well polished, as this helps
    to prevent misting.
    Clean the outside of the windows with Saab
    washer fluid. This is especially important if
    the car has been washed in an automatic
    car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is
    used that can contaminate the windshield
    and impair the performance of the wipers.
    In the U.S., Saab offers a full complement of
    car care products. See your dealer or visit
    us at www.saabcatalog.com.

    Convertible:
    • If a pressure washer is used be heedful of
    the following recommendations:
    • on the lower part of the car (not higher
    than the door handles): max pressure
    of 100 bar and not closer than 8 in.
    (20 cm).
    • on the upper part of the car: tax pressure of 100 bar and not closer than
    32 in. (80 cm).
    • Do not use any drying chemicals or waterproofing agents.
    • Avoid automatic car washes.

    WARNING
    • Read and follow the instructions on
    the packaging of the recommended
    cleaning agents and waterproofing
    agents. We recommend that you
    contact an authorised Saab workshop
    regarding recommended cleaning
    agents and waterproofing agents.
    • Never treat the soft top with hot wax or
    similar.



  • Page 263

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 263 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    • Never use petrochemical based
    solvents for cleaning. Only use water
    with a recommended cleaning agent.
    Petrochemical based solvents can
    cause irreparable damage to the soft
    top.
    • Never use a pressure washer to clean
    the soft top. Only use normal household water pressure.

    NOTICE
    • Only operate the soft top when it is
    clean and dry.
    • Do not lower the soft top when it is
    damp. This can cause folds and pressure marks. If the soft top is heavily
    soiled, the dirt may cause irreparable
    visible chafe marks.
    • Only use water, recommended cleaning agents and a microfibre cloth if
    the soft top is already damaged, otherwise the damage can become worse.
    • At creases, seams and window edges
    the cleaning motion should be away
    from the crease, seam or window
    edge in to the soft top.

    When the soft top is only slightly soiled,
    follow the directions on the cleaning agent
    packaging. No brushing is necessary.
    Check the soft top for water penetration
    from time to time by spraying a small
    amount of water on it. If water does not form
    droplets but disappear into the material, it is
    recommended to wash normally and then
    waterproof.
    If the soft top is heavily soiled and normal
    recommended cleaning does not produce a
    noticeable improvement, carry out the following.

    263

    4 Move the washing brush backwards and
    forwards, not diagonally, from side to
    side or in circles. Use a soft brush, like a
    clothes brush or a micro fibre cloth so
    that the cleaning agent foams. Never
    use a wire brush.
    5 Then rinse the soft top with warm water
    and brush using a soft brush in the direction of the vehicle until all foam has
    disappeared. Brush carefully to prevent
    damaging the material.

    WARNING

    The following cleaning method must be only
    used if the soft top is heavily soiled and must
    not be carried out more than twice a year.
    1 Stop normal cleaning.

    Water hotter than 37 °C can burn the skin,
    cause skin irritation and/or cause injuries.
    Use suitable protection.

    2 Rinse off the thick dirt thoroughly with
    water.
    3 Spray the newly rinsed soft top with the
    recommended cleaning agent and allow
    it to work in for 15-20 minutes.

    6 Dry the soft top using a clean chamois
    leather or a cloth that does not leave lint
    on the soft top.
    7 Allow the soft top to dry fully. Touch with
    a hand after a while, if the material feels
    damp, allow it to dry for longer.



  • Page 264

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 264 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    264

    Car care

    8 If spots are still visible, repeat the treatment on these spots as before. Press
    lightly with the brush to prevent damaging the material. Do not use the brush
    excessively. This can irreparably
    damage the material. Do not repeat the
    treatment more than twice.
    9 When the soft top has fully dried, it must
    be waterproofed immediately. Only use
    the recommended waterproofing agent.
    Follow the instructions on the packaging.
    10 To obtain even and optimum waterproofing, the car must be closed for
    24 hours after treatment. Do not touch
    the material and do not place any
    objects on it.

    Waxing and polishing
    Do not wax a new car during the first three
    or four months. In fact, there is no need to
    polish the car before the paintwork has
    started to dull through oxidation. Other than
    in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive
    polishes containing a cutting agent on a new
    car. Always wash the car thoroughly before
    waxing or polishing.

    Touching up the paint
    Damaged paintwork should be treated as
    soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
    the greater the risk of corrosion. The anticorrosion warranty does not cover corrosion
    resulting from untreated defects.
    Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
    usually extensive and can only be properly
    restored by professionals.
    However, you can repair small scratches
    and stone chip damage yourself. The necessary tools and materials, such as primer,
    touch-up paint and brushes, are available
    from a workshop. We recommend that you
    contact a Saab dealer.
    In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
    where the metal has not been exposed and
    an undamaged layer of paint remains,
    touch-up paint can usually be applied
    directly, after any dirt has been scraped
    away using a pointed knife.

    If corrosion has already set in, such as the
    result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
    knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possible, the damaged area should be taken
    back to the bare metal. The metal should
    then be primed with two thin coats of primer
    applied by brush.
    After the primer has dried, apply several thin
    layers of topcoat until the surface of the
    repaired area is flush with the surrounding
    paintwork.
    Stir both primer and touch-up paint thoroughly before use and allow each coat to
    dry before applying the next.

    Two-coat enamel
    As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
    applied in two operations. The first coat, the
    base color, contains the pigment, metal
    flakes and binder. The second coat consists
    of a clear enamel, which provides the final
    gloss for the paintwork and protects the
    base from moisture and environmental contaminants.
    Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
    1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
    2 Then apply the primer, base color and
    finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the
    best finish, apply two or three coats of
    primer.



  • Page 265

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 265 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care

    Anti-corrosion
    treatment
    The entire car undergoes a series of anticorrosion processes during production.
    These include electrophoretic priming,
    PVC-based coating to protect against stone
    chip damage and corrosion, and treatment
    of body cavities and members with thin,
    penetrating rustproofing oil.
    In addition, most body panels, such as the
    hood, doors and floor pan are galvanized.
    The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts
    of the car is constantly exposed to wear and
    prone to damage. This applies particularly
    to the underside of the car and inside the
    wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the
    like that are thrown up can give rise to corrosion where the underseal has worn away.
    The extent of this obviously depends on the
    conditions in which the car is used.
    Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the
    underside of the car often and to inspect the
    condition of the underseal. The anti-corrosion warranty does not relieve the car owner
    of the need to carry out normal maintenance
    to the rustproofing and to make good any
    damage.

    Use a hose to clean the underside of the car
    thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or
    spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion
    agent to any worn or damaged areas, to
    prevent the onset of corrosion.
    Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has
    expired, it makes good sense to continue to
    maintain the rustproofing.
    Seams in the body, especially those in the
    doors and trunk lid, are particularly vulnerable to corrosion from the outside, caused by
    grit and salt thrown up from the road, and to
    corrosion from the inside, largely as a result
    of condensation. Keep the seams clean and
    at the first sign of any rust, apply a thin, penetrating, anti-corrosion oil. Your Saab
    dealer will be pleased to give you further
    advice.

    Surface treatment composition
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7

    Body panel
    Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm
    Phosphate coating 3 –5 µm
    Cathodic ED 23 µm
    Intermediate coat 35 µm
    Metallic base/solid base 11 µm
    Clear enamel 45 µm

    265



  • Page 266

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 266 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    266

    Car care

    What causes rust?

    Preventive maintenance

    Steel body panels of automobiles are subject to rusting whenever air and moisture
    manage to penetrate the protective finish.
    Body panels may rust through if the process
    is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever
    water is trapped or where the car’s panels
    are continuously damp.

    The following procedures are necessary to
    help protect against rusting. Refer also to
    the terms and conditions of the Performation Limited Warranty described in the warranty booklet.

    Damage to paint and undercoating by
    stones, gravel and minor crashes immediately exposes metal to air and moisture.
    Road salts used for de-icing will collect on
    the bottom of the car and promote rusting.
    Areas of the country with high humidity have
    a greater potential for rust problems, especially where salt is used on roads or there is
    moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)
    may also damage paint and promote rusting.

    1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
    least twice a year. Under adverse
    conditions, where there is a rapid
    buildup of dirt, sand or road salt, wash
    your car at least once a week. After
    extreme exposure to salted snow or
    slush, evidenced by a white film on the
    car, wash the car immediately. Frequent
    washing will prevent paint damage from
    acid rain and other airborne contaminants such as tree sap and bird droppings. If any of these contaminants are
    noticed on the car the finish should be
    washed immediately.
    • Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
    with water to loosen and flush off heavy
    concentrations of dirt (include the
    underbody).

    • Sponge the car with a solution of either a
    good quality car soap or mild general
    purpose (dish washing) detergent and
    water.
    • Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
    • After washing, check and clear all
    drains in doors and body panels.
    • Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
    chamois.
    2 Clean the underside of the car during
    the winter. Use high pressure water to
    clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
    wheel wells) at least at mid-winter and in
    the spring.



  • Page 267

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 267 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
    damage, and arrange for needed
    repairs promptly. After washing or
    after heavy rain, check for leaks. When
    washing the car inspect body surfaces
    for paint damage. While checking for
    leaks, lift the floor mats and check
    underneath them. Water can collect in
    these areas and remain for prolonged
    periods. Dry any wet areas including the
    floor mats. Have leaks repaired as soon
    as possible.
    Use touch-up paint to repair small
    scratches or minor finish damage. Areas
    where metal is exposed will rust quickly
    and MUST be repaired immediately by
    touch-up or professional repainting.
    Rust must be removed, the bare metal
    primed and painted. Major body
    damage should be repaired immediately
    and new panels or exposed areas
    should be undercoated with anti- corrosion material.
    Repairs of this type are the owner’s
    responsibility and are not covered under
    warranty.

    Inspect the undercoating and touch up if
    necessary. Pay particular attention to the
    fenders and wheel housings, which are
    exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If
    the composition has worn or flaked off, the
    steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried
    before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning
    is best done with a scraper and a steel wire
    brush, followed by washing with solvent.
    Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it
    may run off or fall off when dry.

    267

    Recovery and/or
    recycling of automotive
    materials
    Information on the scrapping and recycling
    of car materials is available on
    www.saab.com.



  • Page 268

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 268 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    268

    Car care

    Air conditioning (A/C)
    WARNING
    • All repairs and adjustments to the A/C
    system must be carried out at a Saab
    dealer authorized for this kind of work.
    • The A/C system is pressurized. Do not
    break any connections or undo A/C
    system components.
    • Escaping gas can cause eye injury or
    other personal injury.

    NOTICE
    • The A/C system is designed for use
    with R134a refrigerant.
    • Refrigerant handling requires special
    equipment and special procedures for
    charging and draining the system.
    • Never mix R 134a with other refrigerants.

    Troubleshooting
    If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
    a number of checks you can perform yourself. If the fault persists, however, have the
    system checked at a workshop. We recommend that you contact a Saab dealer.

    Maintenance
    NOTICE
    Do not use a pressure washer when
    cleaning the condenser or radiator due to
    the risk of damage.

    Note:
    When the A/C system is running, the intake
    air is dehumidified. The resultant condensation that forms on the evaporator is drained
    off under the car. When the car is parked,
    this may result in a small puddle forming on
    the ground. The warmer the air and the
    higher the relative humidity, the more condensation will be produced.

    Inadequate cooling
    a Check that the condenser (in front of the
    radiator) has not become clogged with
    dirt and insects.
    b Make sure that the compressor drive
    belt does not slip (see page 216).
    c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
    and compressor (see page 236).

    • The compressor drive belt should be
    inspected under the regular service
    program.
    • Clean away dirt and insects from the
    condenser and radiator to prevent clogging. When washing the car, use the hose
    to spray the radiator and condenser
    (located in front of the radiator) from both
    sides (both from the front of the car and
    from inside the engine bay). Do not use a
    pressure washer.
    Caution: Do not hose down the radiator and condenser while the engine is
    hot.



  • Page 269

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 269 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    Other than in extremely cold weather, do not
    screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
    will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.

    Headlight aiming

    • Applicable to the manual climate control
    system - During cold months the air conditioning should be switched on once or
    twice a month and run for 5–10 minutes
    during highway driving once the engine is
    warm.
    This action saves the gaskets in the
    compressor from being spoiled. The
    compressor uses a lubricant that circulates with the coolant.

    WARNING

    Note:
    The A/C system cannot be switched on
    when the outside temperature is below 32°F
    (0°C). Turn on the A/C system when the car
    is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to
    always have the A/C button pressed in. The
    A/C system will then cut in automatically
    when the outside temperature is high
    enough.

    Before checking/adjusting the headlight
    aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
    danger of fingers and hands being injured
    by moving parts.
    The radiator fan can start up even when
    the engine is switched off.
    The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
    aiming system equipped with vertical
    aiming device. The aim has been preset at
    the factory and should normally not need
    further adjustments.
    If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
    the headlight aim may be affected. If you
    believe your headlights need to be reaimed, we recommend that you take it to
    your Saab dealer for service. However, it is
    possible for you to re-aim your headlights as
    described in the following procedure.

    NOTICE
    To make sure that your headlights are
    aimed properly read all instructions
    before beginning. Failure to follow these
    instructions could cause damage to
    headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
    headlight.

    269

    To check the aim, the vehicle should be
    properly prepared as follows:
    • The vehicle shall be placed so that the
    headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
    colored wall or other flat surface. The
    aiming area should be darkened, this will
    improve your ability to see the beam of the
    low beam headlight being aimed.
    An optical headlamp aimer can also be
    used and will than replace the wall.
    • The vehicle must have all four wheels on
    a perfectly level surface which is level all
    the way to the wall or other flat surface.
    • The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
    • The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
    tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
    (75 kg) on the drivers seat.
    • The vehicle should be fully assembled
    and all other work stopped while headlight
    aiming is being done.
    • The vehicle should not have any snow,
    ice or mud attached to it.
    • Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
    pressure.
    • Close all doors.
    • Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.
    Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
    low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
    be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
    are aimed properly.



  • Page 270

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 270 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    270

    1
    2
    3
    4

    Car care

    Wall or garage door.
    25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
    Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
    Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches.

    If you find that the headlight needs adjustment follow these steps:
    1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
    aiming devices there are two vertical
    aiming devices which shall be turned
    simultaneously and the same amount of
    turns.
    2 Locate the marker on the lens.
    3 Measure the distance from the ground to
    the aim marker No.1 on each lens.
    Subtract 2 inches.
    4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
    from the ground to the recorded
    distance (see point 4) and draw a horizontal line the width of the vehicle.

    5 Cars with xenon lights:
    Xenon lights with automatic headlight
    levelling system must first do a reference run before aiming: Start the engine
    and let the headlights do a reference
    run. Turn off the engine but leave the low
    beam on.
    Cars with halogen lights:
    Turn on the low beam headlights.
    Both variants:
    Place a piece of cardboard or equivalent
    (although not directly on the lens) in front
    of the headlight not being aimed. This
    should allow the beam cut-off of the
    headlight being aimed to be seen on the
    flat surface.

    Vertical aiming device

    1 Aiming marker on headlight lens



  • Page 271

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 271 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Car care
    NOTICE
    Do not cover a headlight directly on the
    lens to improve beam cut-off when
    aiming. Covering a headlight may cause
    excessive heat build-up that may cause
    damage to the headlight.
    6 Turn the two vertical aiming screws
    simultaneously in the same direction
    indicated on the headlight until the horizontal cut-off of the headlight is aligned
    with the horizontal line on the wall.
    7 If an optical headlight aimer device is
    used follow point 1 and 2 and center the
    lens of the optical headlight aimer
    device at the intersection of the two
    markers on the headlight lens.
    Then follow the instructions in the optical
    headlight aimer instruction manual and
    point 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this instruction.

    Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface

    Correctly adjusted low beam

    271



  • Page 272

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 272 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    272

    Car care

    (This page has been left blank.)



  • Page 273

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 273 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Customer Assistance and Information

    273

    Customer Assistance and Information
    Maintenance schedule __
    Owner assistance ______
    Reporting Safety Defects
    (USA) _______________
    Reporting Safety Defects
    to the Canadian
    government__________
    Vehicle Data Collection
    and Event Data
    Recorders ___________

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    274
    276
    277

    277

    278



  • Page 274

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 274 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    274

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Maintenance schedule
    The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
    service program to the purchaser/operator
    of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
    to ensure the proper emission control systems function, safety and reliability of the
    Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
    maintenance is recommended for specific
    components when the car is operated under
    certain severe conditions. Proper maintenance is always a good practice!
    Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
    trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
    They regularly receive up-to-date Saab service manuals and parts and technical service bulletins from Saab and are able,
    through their franchise agreement, to attend
    Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
    tools and technical assistance and purchase original equipment service and
    replacement parts.
    Today’s complex automobiles should only
    be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
    service professionals. A Saab dealer is your
    best choice.

    SERVICE INTERVALS

    TIME FOR MAIN SERVICE

    A time for service message will illuminate on
    the Saab Instrument Display (SID) when the
    car is due for regular maintenance.

    will be set when additional maintenance is
    necessary, such as air filter or spark plug
    replacement. When the message Time for
    service. is displayed, contact your Saab
    Dealer for a service appointment.

    Time for service.
    There are three different messages that will
    appear:
    TIME FOR INTERMEDIATE SERVICE
    indicates that an oil/filter change is required
    along with several inspections. This message is set by the engine management
    system which calculates service intervals
    based on several factors including driving
    habits, ambient temperature, number of
    cold starts, mileage driven and elapsed time
    since the last service. If mileage accumulation does not occur, the message will be set,
    and maintenance required at a maximum of
    1 year.
    TIME FOR MAIN AND INTERMEDIATE
    SERVICE
    indicates that an oil/filter change is required
    along with several inspections and additional maintenance such as air filter or spark
    plug replacement.

    Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
    in a timely manner may result in serious
    damage to key components or systems.



  • Page 275

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 275 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Customer Assistance and Information

    275

    Engine oil and filter changes

    Service record retention

    Service costs

    Changing the engine oil and filter is required
    at every service point. Use only a Saab
    approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
    meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
    service classifications stated in the “Technical data” section of this Owner’s Manual.
    The use of extra additives in the oil is not
    necessary and is not recommended, and
    may be harmful to turbochargers.

    It is the owner’s responsibility to retain service records. If possible, you should keep
    copies of all shop work orders for all service
    and repairs, whenever performed. As indicated in the new car and emission control
    system warranties, it is important to document that all necessary maintenance has
    been done.

    Dealer pricing practices and labor for service work vary. Saab’s recommended service times for each service point do not
    include the labor required to replace wear
    items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
    tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
    repairs found to be necessary as a result of
    the inspections included in these times.
    Additional labor and parts will be charged
    for such work when necessary, except as
    covered under an applicable Saab warranty
    or any optional extended service contract.
    Transmission fluid changes or suspension
    alignment, when necessary, are also additional.

    More frequent oil changes are recommended if your vehicle is operated under
    any of the following conditions:
    • Most trips are less than 5–10 miles (8–
    16 km). This is particularly important
    when outside temperatures are below
    freezing.
    • Most trips include extensive idling
    (frequent stop-and-go traffic).
    • Most trips are through dusty areas (such
    as construction zones).
    • If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
    police, taxi or other commercial applications.
    If your driving habits match this description,
    have the engine oil and filter changed inbetween normal services. These conditions
    cause the engine oil to break down faster.
    The Warranties and Service Record Booklet has provisions to record extra oil
    changes.

    HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS ORGANIZED
    The service record is comprised of a series
    of coupons on which to record services as
    they are performed. There are additional
    coupons for documenting extra engine oil
    and filter changes, extra automatic transmission fluid services necessary for severe
    service conditions, and brake fluid changes.
    HOW TO USE THE SERVICE RECORD
    COUPONS
    When the car is brought to a Saab dealer for
    scheduled maintenance, present the Warranties & Service Record Booklet to the service manager. When the technician has
    completed the service, the technician will
    sign the maintenance record. The person
    responsible for quality assurance at the
    dealership will also sign and stamp the
    record with the dealer identification stamp.

    Dealer charges for general shop material,
    regulated hazardous waste removal, recycling expenses or other operation costs may
    also be applied to service and repair
    invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
    location.



  • Page 276

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 276 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    276

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Owner assistance

    Change of Address Notification
    (U.S. and Canada)

    Warranties and service problem
    assistance

    Two change of address cards are provided
    at the end of the Warranties and Service
    Record Booklet. Knowing your current
    address allows Saab to contact you in the
    event of a recall or service campaign.
    Please help us keep our records up to date
    for your own peace of mind.

    For complete information about all applicable warranties, including the New Car Warranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emission Warranty and Emission Perforation
    Warranty, consult the Warranties and Service Record Booklet which accompanies
    this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
    assistance information including Saab
    Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or
    misplaced, a new one may be ordered
    through a Saab dealer or by contacting
    Saab.
    In the U.S. there is a national Customer
    Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    The toll-free number to call from all 50 states
    is 1-800-955-9007.
    In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
    Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
    A list of authorized Saab sales and service
    dealers is available for those planning to
    travel in the United States and Canada.
    Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
    Customer Assistance Center in the country
    in which they are traveling.

    Service information
    Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
    and 9-5 car lines can be ordered through
    your dealer. These are comprehensive
    manuals on CD rom, geared to use by professional technicians. Consult your Saab
    dealer for prices for your model.



  • Page 277

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 277 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Reporting Safety
    Defects (USA)
    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
    which could cause a crash or could cause
    injury or death, you should immediately
    inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
    Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
    may open an investigation, and if it finds that
    a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
    it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
    However, NHTSA cannot become involved
    in individual problems between you, your
    dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    To contact NHTSA, you may call the tollfree Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-3274236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153; go to http://
    www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
    Washington D.C. 20590. You can also
    obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www safercar.gov.

    Reporting Safety
    Defects to the Canadian
    government
    If you live in Canada, and believe that your
    vehicle has a safety defect, you should
    immediately notify Transport Canada, in
    addition to notifying General Motors of
    Canada Limited.
    You may write to Transport Canada at Box
    8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
    In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
    a situation like this, we certainly hope you
    will notify us. In Canada, please call our
    Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1800-263-1999.
    Or write:
    General Motors of Canada Limited
    Customer Assistance Centre,
    1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
    Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.

    277



  • Page 278

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 278 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    278

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Vehicle Data Collection and
    Event Data Recorders
    Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
    Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components
    to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag deployment and, if so
    equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and
    to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information
    may be stored during regular operations to
    facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
    other information is stored only in a crash
    event by computer systems commonly
    called event data recorders (EDR).
    In a crash event, computer systems, such
    as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic
    Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record
    information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as data
    related to engine speed, brake application,
    throttle position, vehicle speed, steering
    wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt
    usage, air bag readiness, air bag performance, and the severity of a collision. This
    information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to
    improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the data
    recorders on many airplanes, these onboard systems do not record sounds, such
    as conversation of vehicle occupants.

    To read this information, special equipment
    is needed and access to the vehicle or the
    SDM is required.
    Saab will not access information about a
    crash event or share it with others other than
    • with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
    if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
    the lessee,
    • in response to an official request of police
    or similar government office,
    • as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
    through the discovery process, or
    • as required by law.
    In addition, once Saab collects or receives
    data, Saab may
    • use the data for Saab research needs,
    • make it available for research where
    appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown, or
    • share summary data which is not tied to a
    specific vehicle with non-Saab organizations for research purposes.
    Others, such as law enforcement, may have
    access to the special equipment that can
    read the information if they have access to
    the vehicle or SDM.
    If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,
    please check the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual for information
    on its operations and data collection.



  • Page 279

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 279 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data

    279

    Technical data
    General data __________
    Engine _______________
    Engine oil _____________
    Fuel__________________
    Engines ______________
    Electrical system_______
    Drive belt _____________
    Manual transmission ___
    Automatic transmission _
    Suspension ___________
    Steering ______________
    Brake system__________
    Wheels and tires _______
    Plates and labels _______

    3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
    (can depend on model variant, engine variant,
    market specification, options or accessories).

    280
    283
    284
    285
    286
    286
    287
    287
    288
    288
    288
    289
    290
    293



  • Page 280

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 280 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    280

    Technical data

    General data
    Overall length, including bumpers: ______
    Sport Sedan and Convertible _________
    SportCombi_______________________
    Overall width, including door mirrors _____
    Maximum height ____________________
    Wheelbase ________________________
    Track:
    Front ____________________________
    Rear ____________________________
    Ground clearance at GVW ____________

    182.5'' (4635 mm)
    183.2'' (4654 mm)
    80.2'' (2038 mm)
    60.6'' (1539 mm)
    105.3'' (2675 mm)
    59.8'' (1524 mm)
    59.3'' (1506 mm)
    approx. 4.7''
    (120 mm)

    Number of seats (incl. driver):
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________ 5
    Convertible _______________________ 4
    Turning circle:
    Measured at vehicle extremities _______ 39.0 ft. (11.9 m)

    V.I.N. label on vehicles sold in U.S.A.

    V.I.N. label on vehicles sold in
    Canada

    Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight. The maximum
    permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
    The precise curb weight of the vehicle and load capacity are specified in the vehicle
    registration documents.

    Trunk length, Sport Sedan:
    Rear seat raised ___________________
    Rear seat lowered _________________
    Trunk length, Convertible _____________
    Trunk length, SportCombi:
    Rear seat raised ___________________
    Rear seat lowered _________________
    Trunk volume (VDA):
    Sport Sedan ______________________
    Convertible, soft top raised___________
    Convertible, soft top folded___________
    SportCombi ______________________
    SportCombi with rear seat lowered ____

    40.8'' (1036 mm)
    69.8'' (1774 mm)
    29.1" (740 mm)
    39.9'' (1013 mm)
    70.0'' (1777 mm)
    15.0 cu.ft. (425 l)
    12.4 cu.ft. (352 l)
    8.3 cu.ft. (235 l)
    14.8 cu.ft. (419 l)
    45.0 cu.ft. (1273 l)



  • Page 281

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 281 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    Curb weight
    (i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid reservoir, standard tools and spare wheel):
    Sport Sedan ______________________ 3210–3570 lbs.
    (1455–1620 kg)
    Convertible _______________________ 3510–3840 lbs.
    (1590–1740 kg)
    SportCombi_______________________ 3300–3690 lbs.
    (1495–1675 kg)
    Gross vehicle weight (GVW):
    Sport Sedan ______________________ 4140–4510 lbs.
    (1880–2045 kg)
    Convertible _______________________ 4350–4620 lbs.
    (1975–2095 kg)
    SportCombi_______________________ 4230–4630 lbs.
    (1920–2100 kg)
    Maximum axle load:
    Sport Sedan, front _________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
    Sport Sedan, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
    Convertible, front __________________ 2540 lbs. (1150 kg)
    Convertible, rear ___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
    SportCombi, front __________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
    SportCombi, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
    Weight distribution:
    Curb weight + driver (150 lbs. (68 kg)),
    front/rear, Sport Sedan and SportCombi approx. 60/40 %
    GVW, front/rear, Sport Sedan and SportCombi ___________________________ approx. 50/50 %

    Maximum roof load, Sport Sedan and SportCombi ___________________________
    Maximum load in trunk, Sport Sedan, Convertible and SportCombi_____________
    The combined weight of occupants and
    cargo should never exceed:
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________
    Convertible _______________________
    Maximum combined weight of driver and
    passengers ______________________
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi (5x150 lbs.)
    Convertible (4x150 lbs.) _____________

    281

    220 lbs. (100 kg)
    175 lbs. (80 kg)

    926 lbs. (420 kg)
    776 lbs. (352 kg)

    750 lbs. (340 kg)
    600 lbs. (272 kg)



  • Page 282

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 282 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    282

    Technical data
    WARNING

    • The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
    Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
    fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
    these.
    • When carrying a load in the trunk, make sure that it is lashed
    down securely, particularly when part or all of the rear seat is
    folded down.

    Trailer:
    Trailer with brakes ___________________
    Trailer without brakes ________________
    Recommended towball load ___________

    Max. 3500 lbs.
    (1588 kg)
    Max. 1000 lbs.
    (450 kg)
    110–165 lbs.
    (50–75 kg)
    See also page 190.

    Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer
    with brakes _______________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)
    Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer National restrictions
    without brakes ____________________ apply
    When towing a trailer, increase the pressure
    of the rear tires by 20 kPa (3 psi).
    The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
    Saab Automobile AB.
    Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
    weights (see page 188).



  • Page 283

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 283 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    Engine
    Type:
    4-cyl engine ______________________ Four cylinders,
    double overhead
    camshafts,
    16 valves, two
    balancer shafts
    V6 engine ________________________ Six cylinders,
    4 overhead camshafts, 24 valves,
    the angle between
    the cylinder rows is
    60°
    Cylinder bore:
    4-cyl engine ______________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
    V6 engine ________________________ 3.504'' (89 mm)
    Stroke:
    4-cyl engine ______________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
    V6 engine ________________________ 2.945'' (74.8 mm)
    Swept volume:
    4-cyl engine ______________________ 122 cu.in. (1.998 l)
    V6 engine ________________________ 170 cu.in. (2.792 l)

    Idling speed _______________________

    Antifreeze _________________________
    Coolant capacity:
    4-cyl engine ______________________
    V6 engine ________________________

    283

    720 rpm.
    When the engine
    load increases, e.g.
    the steering wheel is
    turned, the idling
    speed is raised to
    900 rpm.
    Saab-approved
    antifreeze
    7.5 qts. (7.1 l)
    9.5 qts. (9.0 l)



  • Page 284

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 284 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    284

    Technical data

    Engine oil
    To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all engines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill oils.
    Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental issues
    are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved by
    Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that
    protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.
    Approved oils:

    Servicing/Oil changes:
    To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
    use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils approved for your engine. Service should be done according to
    the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
    function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
    take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to neglecting to meet above mentioned requirements.

    For all gasoline engines - fully synthetic engine oil - approved
    against the GM-LL-A025 specification - with viscosity SAE 0W30 or 0W-40. To benefit from Saab´s specified service intervals,
    pleasure ensure to select a fully synthetic engine oil approved
    against GM-LL-A025.

    At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil engine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to meet
    your engines specific needs. We recommend that you, with the
    help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil from that
    selection.

    For optimum performence Saab recommends the use of Saab
    Long Life Turbo Oil 0W-30 or Mobil 1 0W-40 European Car Formula, but other fully synthetic oils approved against the above
    specification and with proper SAE viscosity 0W-30 or 0W-40
    may also be used.

    Other oil companies also offer engine oils approved against GM
    specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be marked as
    synthetic. However, not all synthetic engine oils will meet your
    engines specific requirements. Please ensure only to use fully
    synthetic oils approved against your engines specific requirements, i.e. GM-LL-A025 with viscosity SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W40.
    Recommended oil viscosities.
    Viscosity is a measurement of the oil´s thickness at various
    temperatures, according to the SAE standard. The thickness influences e.g. fuel economy and cold starting properties. For optimum performance Saab recommends:
    For gasoline engines:
    SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40 engine oil.



  • Page 285

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 285 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    Fuel

    Extra engine oil additives.
    Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all
    you will need for good engine performance and protection.
    When to change engine oil.
    Your vehicle has a display (SID) where time for service will be
    shown. Based not only on mileage but also on driving conditions the mileage at which a service will be indicated can vary
    considerably.
    For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that
    the right engine oil is used.
    When the message for service is displayed you need to have
    the required service done as soon as possible.
    After the service your service personnel will reset the service indicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
    optimize the time to the next service.
    Oil capacity, including filter (oil change)
    4-cyl engine ______________________
    V6 engine ________________________

    285

    6.3 qts. (6.0 l)
    6.3 qts. (6.0 l)

    Fuel tank capacity________________

    16.05 U.S. gal. (61 l)

    For optimum performance Saab recom- Gasoline engines –
    mends: _______________________ AON 90.
    Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not
    lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall
    slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
    optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
    For further information on fuel, see page 159.



  • Page 286

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 286 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    286

    Technical data

    Engines
    2.0T Ecopower
    Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 210 hp (155 kW)
    Maximum torque, EEC at 2500-4000 rpm 221 ft.lb. (300 Nm)
    Compression ratio__________________ 9.5:1
    2.8 V6 (250) Ecopower
    Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 250 hp (184 kW)
    Maximum torque, EEC at 1800-4500 rpm 257 ft.lb. (350 Nm)
    Compression ratio__________________ 10.0:1

    Electrical system
    Voltage ___________________________
    Battery capacity ____________________
    Starter motor:
    4-cyl engine ______________________
    V6 engine ________________________
    Alternator rating:
    4-cyl engine with manual gearbox _____
    4-cyl engine with automatic gearbox ___
    V6 engine ________________________
    Firing order ________________________
    4-cyl engine ______________________
    V6 engine ________________________
    Spark plugs:
    4-cyl engine
    Type ____________________________
    Electrode gap _____________________
    Tightening torque __________________
    V6 engine
    Type ____________________________
    Electrode gap _____________________
    Tightening torque __________________

    12 V
    60 Ah
    1.8 kW
    1.4 kW
    120 A/14 V
    140 A/14 V
    155 A/14 V
    1-3-4-2
    1-2-3-4-5-6

    NGK PFR6T-10G
    0.9–1.0 mm
    20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)
    PLFR6C 10G
    0.9–1.0 mm
    20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)



  • Page 287

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 287 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    Drive belt

    Manual transmission

    Outside length______________________
    4-cyl engine ______________________
    V6 engine ________________________

    Type _____________________________
    40.472'' (1028 mm)
    83.463'' (2120 mm)

    Oil type (for topping up)_______________
    Oil capacity:
    5-speed _________________________
    6-speed, 2.8 V6 ___________________
    Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
    gear (5th gear) ____________________
    Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
    gear (6th gear) ____________________

    Drive belt, 4-cyl engine

    287

    Drive belt, V6 engine

    Fully synchronized
    with final drive gear
    and differential
    Saab MTF 0063
    1.9 qts. (1.8 l), to
    level plug
    3.15 qts. (3.0 l)
    27–30 (43–48)
    29–35 (46–56)



  • Page 288

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 288 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    288

    Technical data

    Automatic transmission
    Type:
    5-speed__________________________

    6-speed__________________________

    Selector lever positions _______________
    Clutch type ________________________

    Suspension
    Electronically controlled, 5-speed,
    fully-automatic with
    hydraulic torque
    converter, planetary
    gears and integral
    final drive.
    Lock-up function in
    selector positions 3,
    4 and 5.
    Electronicallycontrolled, 6-speed,
    fully-automatic with
    hydraulic torque
    converter, planetary
    gears and integral
    final drive.
    Lock-up function for
    1st to 6th gear.
    P, R, N, D, M
    Hydraulic plate
    clutches, brake
    bands and one-way
    couplings

    Speed mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in top gear:
    5-speed__________________________ 18–31 (29–49)
    6-speed__________________________ 33–41 (53–66)

    Spring type, front and rear ____________
    Maximum deflection of springs:
    Front ____________________________
    Rear ____________________________
    Dampers, front and rear ______________

    Coil springs
    7.0'' (178 mm)
    8.3'' (212 mm)
    Oil and gas-filled
    twin-tube

    Steering
    Steering __________________________

    Number of turns, lock to lock___________
    Oil type ___________________________

    Power-assisted
    steering gear of
    rack-pinion type and
    telescopic jointed
    steering column
    2.97
    Power steering fluid
    CHF 11S or
    CHF 202



  • Page 289

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 289 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    Brake system
    Foot brake (ABS)____________________ Hydraulic disc
    brakes with vacuum
    servo unit. Diagonally split circuits;
    ventilated discs on
    front wheels (some
    variants also have
    ventilated rear
    discs). EBD function
    (see page 171).
    Park brake_________________________ Acts on rear wheels
    Brake fluid _________________________ To DOT 4.
    Do not use DOT 5.

    Disc diameter:
    Front ____________________________
    Front 3 *) ________________________
    Rear ____________________________
    Rear 3 *) ________________________
    Total friction area of brake pads:
    Front ____________________________
    Front 3 __________________________
    Rear ____________________________
    *)15" wheels and 16" aluminium wheels
    must not be fitted to these variants since
    the diameter of the brake discs does not
    allow this.
    **) ventilated

    11.22 in.
    (285 mm) **)
    11.81 in.
    (300 mm) **)
    10.94 in. (278 mm)
    11.42 in.
    (290 mm) **)
    9.30 in.² (60 cm²)
    9.61 in.² (62 cm²)
    4.96 in.² (32 cm²)

    Hydraulic unit for soft top, Convertible
    Oil capacity_______________________
    Oil type __________________________

    289

    0.6 qt. (0.6 l)
    CHF 11S



  • Page 290

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 290 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    290

    Technical data

    Wheels and tires
    All season tires
    6.5 x 16" _________________________

    215/55 R16 97 H
    RF/XL
    235/45 R17 94V

    7.5 x 17" _________________________
    Summer tires
    7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94 W
    Before changing to wheels/tires of another size, we recommend that you contact an authorised Saab workshop regarding
    acceptable options.
    Winter (snow) tires:
    6.5 x 16" wheel ____________________ 215/55 R16 93 Q
    M+S
    7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94 Q
    M+S

    Spare wheel 3
    Compact spare:
    Wheel ___________________________
    Tire _____________________________
    Pressure _________________________
    Maximum life _____________________
    Maximum speed ___________________
    Spare wheel 3
    Full size spare
    Wheel ___________________________
    Tire _____________________________
    Pressure _________________________
    Maximum life _____________________
    Maximum speed ___________________

    4 x 16"
    125/85 R16 99 M
    420 kPa (60 psi)
    2200 miles
    (3500 km)
    50 mph (80 km/h)

    6.5 x 16"
    215/55 R16
    250 kPa (36 psi)
    2200 miles
    (3500 km)
    50 mph (80 km/h)



  • Page 291

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 291 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    NOTICE
    Snow chains:
    Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
    be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
    Wheels
    Tires
    6.5 x 16"_______ 215/55 R16 M+S or
    215/55 R16
    Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains.
    Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
    (50 km/h).
    Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 16".

    291

    Recommended tire/engine combinations
    2.0 Turbo V6 engine
    All season tires
    215/55 R16 97 H RF/XL

    x



    235/45 R17 94 V

    x

    x



    x

    215/55 R16 93 Q

    x

    x

    235/45 R17 94 Q

    x

    x

    6.5 x 16"

    x



    7.5 x 17"

    x

    x

    Summer tires
    235/45 R17 94 W
    Winter (snow) tires

    Wheel sizes

    NOTICE
    Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted for reasons stated on
    page 245.
    Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the curb
    if the car is heavily laden. This particularly applies to cars with
    17" wheels.
    Permitted wheel offset is 41 mm.

    RF/XL = Reinforced (or Extra Load) tire.



  • Page 292

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 292 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    292

    Technical data

    Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires
    Tire size
    All season tires
    215/55 R16 97 H
    RF/XL
    235/45 R17 94 V

    Summer tires
    235/45 R17 94 W

    Winter tires
    215/55 R16 93 Q
    235/45 R17 94Q
    Compact spare 3
    125/85 R16 99 M
    Spare wheel 3
    215/55 R16 93V

    Load/speed
    mph (km/h) *
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    1–5 pers./100– (160–)
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    1–5 pers./100– (160–)

    Front
    Rear
    psi/kPa psi/kPa

    35/240
    35/240
    41/280
    35/240
    35/240
    41/280

    35/240
    35/240
    41/280
    35/240
    35/240
    41/280

    1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
    4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
    1–5 pers./120– (190–) 41/280 41/280
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    Max 50 (80)

    35/240
    41/280
    36/250
    42/290

    35/240
    41/280
    36/250
    42/290

    60/420 60/420

    When the car has the same tire size, the
    same load/speed information applies as for
    the original tires.

    * Do not exceed posted speed limits.
    By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the surrounding air temperature.
    The values for tire pressure in table above are for tires at 68°F
    (20°C).
    The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during
    highway driving), and decrease as they cool.
    When the temperature of the tires increases or decreases by 10
    degrees the tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease
    by 2 psi/10 kPa.



  • Page 293

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 293 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    Plates and labels
    When contacting your Saab dealer it may
    sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s
    vehicle identification, engine and gearbox
    numbers.
    1 V.I.N. number and barcode, inside windshield
    2 Gearbox number
    3 Engine number
    4 USA: Label for color codes (trim and
    body). Tire information label can be found
    on the B-pillar. See also page 251.
    Canada: Label for tire pressure and color
    codes (trim and body)
    5 Certification label
    6 Chassis number (stamped on body).

    293



  • Page 294

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 294 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    294

    Technical data
    Position:

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
    12
    | | | | | | | | | | |
    |
    Vehicle identifi- Y S 3 F D 4 9 Y X 7 1 016584
    cation number:
    | | | | | |
    1 2 3 4 5 6

    1 Region ________
    2 Country _______
    3 Manufacturer ___
    4 Product line ____
    5 Model series ___

    = identification codes for certain chassis components

    Y = Northern Europe
    S = Sweden
    3 = Saab Automobile AB
    F = 9-3
    B = 9-3 Linear
    D = 9-3 Arc
    F = 9-3 Aero

    6

    Body version ___

    7

    Gearbox _______

    8

    Engine variant __

    9
    10
    11

    Check digit_____
    Model year ____
    Factory _______

    12

    Serial number __

    4 = 4-door
    7 = Convertible
    5 = 5-door
    5 = 5-speed manual
    6 = 6-speed manual
    9 = 5-speed automatic
    1 = 6-speed automatic
    Y = 2.0 Turbo
    U = V6 engine
    0-9 or X
    7 = 2007
    1 = Trollhättan
    6 = Graz
    000001-999999



  • Page 295

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 295 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    Several of the systems in your
    Saab can be customized to better
    suit your individual needs.
    Contact your Saab dealer

    Courtesy Headlamp Feature

    Central locking system

    Automatic Climate System (ACC)
    • Convertible: A/C compressor not
    switched off when the soft top is open.

    Some functions are governed by legal
    requirements and cannot therefore be
    reprogrammed.
    We recommend that you consult a Saab
    dealer for further information.
    Listed below are a number of examples of
    programmable functions.
    • Audible confirmation of arming/disarming
    the car alarm.
    • Automatic unlocking when car stopped
    and remote control removed from the ignition switch.
    • Trunk lid locked when car driven off or
    30 s after being shut.

    • The length of time the lights are on.
    • Whether the reversing light or tail lights
    should come on as well as the dipped
    beam.

    295



  • Page 296

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 296 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    296

    Technical data

    Warning and indications that can
    be shown on the SID

    Coolant level low.
    Refill.

    Key not accepted.
    Contact service.

    Which warnings and indications that can be
    shown depends on engine variant and car
    specification.

    Hot engine. Make a
    safe stop. Idle engine.

    Remote control battery
    low. Replace battery.

    Airbag malfunction.
    Contact service.

    Number of keys:
    Active key number:

    Gearbox malfunction.
    Limited performance.

    Steering lock malfunc.
    Make a safe stop.

    Gearbox too hot. Make a
    safe stop. Open hood.

    Pull out key, turn
    steering wheel. Restart.

    Battery not charging.
    Make a safe stop.

    Theft protection failure.
    Contact service.

    Headlight levelling
    malfunction.

    Alarm tripped during
    last arming period.

    Tap brakes lightly
    before using cruise ctrl.

    Rear left seat
    backrest unlocked.

    Traction control failure.
    Contact service.

    Rear right seat
    backrest unlocked.

    Stability control failure.
    Contact service.

    Parking assistance
    malfunction. Service.

    Washer fluid level low.
    Refill.

    Parking assistance
    sensor interference.

    Symbol Text
    Antilock brake malfunc.
    Contact service.
    Brake malfunction.
    Make a safe stop.
    Brake fluid level low.
    Make a safe stop.
    Release park brake.
    Oil pressure low.
    Make a safe stop.
    Low engine oil level.
    Fill oil now.
    Reduced engine power.
    Contact service.
    Limited performance.



  • Page 297

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 297 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Technical data
    Close doors.

    Right front turn signal
    failure.

    Left rear taillight
    failure.

    Left brake light failure

    Right rear turn signal
    failure.

    Right rear taillight
    failure.

    Left high beam failure.

    Right side-mounted
    turn signal failure.

    Time for service.

    Left low beam failure.

    Left side-mounted
    turn signal failure.

    Rear fog light failure.

    Left front position
    light failure.

    Right brake light failure.

    Right front position
    light failure.

    Right high beam failure.

    Left front fog light
    failure.

    Right low beam failure.

    Right front fog light
    failure.

    High mounted stop
    light failure.

    Left reversing light
    failure.

    Left front turn signal
    failure.

    Right reversing light
    failure.

    Left rear turn signal
    failure.

    License plate light
    failure.

    297



  • Page 298

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 298 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    298

    Technical data

    (This page has been left blank.)



  • Page 299

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 299 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Index

    Index
    A
    ABS brakes ____________________ 173
    ACC _________________________ 107
    Adjustment, steering wheel ________ 120
    Air filter _______________________ 211
    Airbag _________________________ 32
    Anchorage eyes, Sport Sedan _____ 141
    Anti-corrosion treatment __________ 267
    Antilock braking system __________ 173
    Anti-spin ______________________ 175
    Ashtrays ______________________ 136
    Autochecking of lights, warning and
    indicator lights __________________ 89
    Autodimming _______________ 125, 126
    Automatic climate control (ACC) ____ 107
    Automatic closing of moonroof _____ 131
    Automatic closing of windows,
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 122
    Automatic transmission ___________ 165

    B
    Battery _______________________ 215
    Bedding-in of new brake pads _____ 163
    Before towing a trailer ____________ 193
    Belt height, Sport Sedan and
    SportCombi ____________________ 14
    Brake fluid, grade _______________ 289

    Brakes ________________________
    Braking _______________________
    Bulb changing __________________
    Bulb table _____________________
    Buying new tires ________________

    172
    172
    221
    235
    246

    C
    Cabin lighting, Convertible _________ 80
    Cabin lighting, Sport Sedan and
    SportCombi ___________________ 133
    Calibrating front electric windows
    with pinch protection _____________ 80
    Calibration of windows, Sport Sedan
    and SportCombi _______________ 123
    Car alarm ______________________ 58
    Car transport ___________________ 199
    Care of air conditioning ___________ 270
    Cargo guard ___________________ 150
    Cargo guard, SportWagon ________ 150
    Cargo net, SportCombi ___________ 147
    Change of address notification _____ 276
    Changing a tire _________________ 259
    Changing bulbs _________________ 221
    Changing the battery, remote control _ 56
    Changing wiper blades ___________ 219
    Checking the number of remote
    controls _______________________ 55
    Checks before towing a trailer _____ 193
    Child safety _____________________ 24
    Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 54
    Child seats _____________________ 24

    299

    Cigarette lighter _________________ 136
    Cleaning the engine bay __________ 263
    Cleaning upholstery ______________ 262
    Closing the soft top manually,
    Convertible ____________________ 70
    Closing the soft top, Convertible _____ 66
    Clutch interlock _________________ 164
    Comfort opening of moonroof ______ 131
    Comfort opening of windows,
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 121
    Compact spare _________________ 256
    Compact spare wheel fitted, driving
    with _________________________ 257
    Compass ______________________ 129
    Convertible _____________________ 63
    Convertible, washing _____________ 264
    Coolant _______________________ 211
    Crash memory, see EDR _________ 278
    Cruise control __________________ 171
    Cup holder _____________________ 134

    D
    Date codes, tires ________________ 256
    Deactivating rear windows,
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 123
    Deactivating the passenger door
    window button, Convertible ________ 79
    Deactivating the rear window
    switches _____________________ 123
    Deep water, driving through _______ 196
    Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 253



  • Page 300

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 300 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    300

    Index

    Determining correct load, tires _____ 255
    Direction indicator stalk switch _____ 101
    Direction indicators ______________ 101
    Dome light, Convertible __________ 232
    Dome light, Sport Sedan __________ 231
    Donor battery, boost starting ______ 200
    Door handles ___________________ 50
    Door mirrors ___________________ 124
    Drive belt ______________________ 218
    Drive belt, length ________________ 287
    Driver’s seat with memory _________ 21
    Driving at night _________________ 197
    Driving in cold climates ___________ 187
    Driving in deep water ____________ 196
    Driving in hot climates ____________ 189
    Driving techniques ______________ 185
    Driving with a compact wheel fitted _ 257
    Driving with a heavy load on hilly
    roads ________________________ 167
    Driving with a load ______________ 196
    Driving with a roof load ___________ 194
    Driving with the trunk lid open ______ 196

    E
    EDR (Event Data Recorders) ______ 278
    ESP, anti-skid system ____________ 177
    Easy entry, Convertible ____________ 75
    Economical motoring ____________ 185
    Electric engine heater ____________ 186
    Electric heating, front seats _______ 114
    Electric windows ________________ 121

    Electric windows, Convertible _______ 79
    Electrical system, technical data ____ 286
    Electrically adjustable seats ________ 20
    Electronic Stability Program (ESP) __ 177
    Electronic steering wheel lock ______ 154
    Emergency opening of the narrow
    backrest, Sport Sedan __________ 142
    Emergency operation of the
    moonroof _____________________ 132
    Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 263
    Engine heater __________________ 186
    Engine immobilizer _______________ 57
    Engine management system ______ 205
    Engine number _________________ 293
    Engine oil, checking _____________ 209
    Engine oil, grade ________________ 284
    Engine oil, volume _______________ 285
    Engine temperature gauge _________ 90
    Engine, description ______________ 204
    Engine, technical data ____________ 283
    Engines _______________________ 286
    Event Data Recorders (EDR) ______ 278
    Extra electrical socket ____________ 136

    F
    Facilitating entry to rear seat,
    Convertible ____________________ 75
    Factors affecting fuel consumption __ 185
    Filler cap ______________________ 160
    Filling a portable fuel container _____ 161
    Filling up ______________________ 159

    Flat spots, tires _________________ 245
    Floor jack ______________________ 260
    Folding down the rear seat
    backrest, SportCombi ___________ 143
    Folding down the rear seat,
    Sport Sedan __________________ 138
    Front fog lights __________________ 101
    Front towing eye ________________ 197
    Fuel container __________________ 161
    Fuel gauge _____________________ 91
    Fuel grade _____________________ 285
    Fuel information _________________ 161
    Functions, car alarm ______________ 60
    Fuse panel in luggage compartment _ 239
    Fuse table _____________________ 238
    Fuses _________________________ 236

    G
    GDO, garage door opener _________ 126
    Gearbox number ________________ 293
    General safety instructions,
    Convertible ____________________ 64
    Glove box _____________________ 136
    Glovebox lighting ________________ 233

    H
    Handbrake _____________________ 179
    Hazard warning lights ____________ 102
    Head restraint, Convertible _________ 76
    Head restraints __________________ 23



  • Page 301

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 301 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Index
    Headlight flasher ________________ 100
    Headlight levelling ________________ 99
    Headlights ______________________ 99
    Hood _________________________ 204
    Horn _________________________ 120
    Horn button ____________________ 120

    K

    I

    LATCH (child safety) ______________ 25
    Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 251
    Labels and plates, location ________ 293
    Lashing eyes, Sport Sedan ________ 141
    Lashing eyes, SportCombi ________ 146
    Laying the car up _______________ 181
    Leather upholstery, cleaning _______ 263
    Lighting in luggage compartment,
    Convertible ____________________ 81
    Limp-home ____________________ 157
    Limp-home, automatic transmission _ 167
    Load carriers, roof _______________ 194
    Load indices, tires _______________ 252
    Loading your vehicle _____________ 253
    Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan ___ 140
    Load-through hatch, SportCombi ___ 145
    Locking a car with flat battery _______ 53
    Locks __________________________ 50
    Long-term parking _______________ 181
    Luggage compartment ___________ 138
    Luggage compartment lighting,
    Convertible ____________________ 81
    Luggage compartment lighting,
    Sport Sedan ______________ 134, 142

    If a tire goes flat ________________ 250
    Ignition switch __________________ 152
    Immobilizer _____________________ 57
    Important considerations for driving _ 156
    Important information, petrol-engined
    cars with catalytic converters _____ 157
    Indicator lights ___________________ 84
    Inflation, tires __________________ 243
    Information about fuel ____________ 161
    Instrument illumination, adjusting ___ 100
    Interior lighting, Convertible ________ 80
    Interior lighting, Sport Sedan and
    SportCombi ___________________ 133
    Interior rearview mirror ___________ 125
    Intermittent malfunctioning, central
    locking _______________________ 52

    J
    Jump starting __________________ 200

    Key ___________________________ 50
    Kick-down _____________________ 166

    L

    301

    Luggage compartment lighting,
    changing _____________________ 233

    M
    MAXI fuses ____________________ 237
    Main instrument panel _____________ 84
    Main/dipped beam _______________ 100
    Maintenance schedule ___________ 274
    Manual gear selection ____________ 170
    Manual gearbox _________________ 164
    Manual tripping of car alarm ________ 60
    Materials used in the car,
    reclamation ___________________ 269
    Memory, driver’s seat _____________ 21
    Messages on SID, Convertible ______ 73
    Milometer _______________________ 92
    Moonroof ______________________ 130
    Mug holder ____________________ 134

    N
    New tires, buying ________________ 246
    Night driving ___________________ 197
    Number plate lighting, changing ____ 233

    O
    ORVR ________________________ 206
    Oil capacity, engine ______________ 285
    Opening handles _________________ 50
    Opening the soft top, Convertible ____ 66



  • Page 302

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 302 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    302

    Index

    Outside mirrors _________________ 124
    Owner assistance _______________ 276

    P
    Panic function, car alarm __________ 60
    Park Brake Shift Lock ____________ 166
    Park Brake Shift Lock, temporary
    override ______________________ 168
    Parking _______________________ 179
    Parking aid ____________________ 182
    Parking brake __________________ 179
    Parking on a hill ________________ 180
    Pinch protection, electric windows,
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 122
    Pinch protection, moonroof ________ 132
    Plates and labels, location ________ 293
    Polishing and waxing ____________ 266
    Poly-V-belt ____________________ 218
    Portable fuel container ___________ 161
    Position lights ___________________ 99
    Power steering fluid, checking _____ 214
    Power steering fluid, grade ________ 288
    Pressure gauge _________________ 90
    Pressure, tires __________________ 243
    Profiles, customized settings _______ 96

    Q
    Quality grading, tires _____________ 247
    Quick guide, remote control ________ 51

    R
    Rain sensor ____________________ 104
    Raising the soft top manually,
    Convertible ____________________ 70
    Reading lights, Convertible _________ 80
    Rear fog light ___________________ 101
    Rear seat, folding down, SportCombi 143
    Rear seat, safety belts ____________ 17
    Rear seats, folding down,
    Sport Sedan __________________ 138
    Rear towing eye ________________ 198
    Rear windows, deactivating,
    Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 123
    Rearview mirrors ________________ 124
    Recommendations for automatic
    transmission, towing a trailer _____ 191
    Recommendations for manual
    gearbox, towing a trailer _________ 192
    Recommended snow chains _______ 290
    Refueling ______________________ 159
    Remote control __________________ 50
    Remote locking malfunction ________ 52
    Replacement, wheel _____________ 249
    Reporting safety defects __________ 277
    Rev counter _____________________ 89
    Reversing lights ________________ 102
    Rollover Pop-up Bars, Convertible ___ 78
    Roof carriers, Sport Sedan and
    SportCombi without roof rails _____ 194
    Roof carriers, SportCombi with roof
    rails _________________________ 195

    Roof lighting, Sport Sedan and
    SportCombi ___________________ 133
    Roof lighting, changing ___________ 231
    Running-in _____________________ 163

    S
    SAHR, head restraint _____________ 23
    SDM _________________________ 278
    SID ___________________________ 91
    SPA __________________________ 182
    Saab Information Display __________ 91
    Saab Parking Assistance _________ 182
    Safety belts _____________________ 12
    Safety belts, rear seat, Sport Sedan
    and SportCombi ________________ 17
    Seatbelts _______________________ 12
    Seatbelts in rear seat, Convertible ___ 77
    Seatbelts, care _________________ 262
    Seatbelts, checking ______________ 262
    Seats __________________________ 18
    Securing a load _________________ 141
    Sentronic, manual gear selection ___ 170
    Service costs ___________________ 275
    Service information ______________ 276
    Service intervals ________________ 274
    Service record retention __________ 275
    Signalling, horn _________________ 120
    Ski hatch, Sport Sedan ___________ 140
    Ski hatch, SportCombi ____________ 145
    Spare wheel ___________________ 256
    Speed ratings, tires ______________ 252



  • Page 303

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 303 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    Index
    Speedometer ___________________ 89
    Starting the engine ______________ 154
    Steering wheel adjustment ________ 120
    Steering wheel lock ______________ 154
    Steps for determining correct load
    limit _________________________ 255
    Storage compartments ___________ 136
    Sun visor ______________________ 134
    Switches _______________________ 99

    T
    TCS __________________________
    Technical data _________________
    Textile carpeting, cleaning ________
    Tie down eyes, Sport Sedan _______
    Tie down eyes, SportCombi _______
    Tightening torque, wheels _________
    Tire chains ____________________
    Tire date code __________________
    Tire inspection and rotation _______
    Tire markings __________________
    Tire sidewall labeling ____________
    Tire sizes _____________________
    Tire terminology and definitions ____
    Tire, changing __________________
    Tire, spare _____________________
    Tires _________________________
    Tools and spare wheel ___________
    Touching up paintwork ___________
    Towbar _______________________
    Towbar load ___________________

    175
    280
    263
    141
    146
    261
    250
    256
    244
    252
    251
    290
    253
    259
    256
    243
    256
    266
    190
    192

    Towing _______________________ 197
    Towing a trailer _________________ 190
    Towing the car _________________ 198
    Traction Control System (TCS) _____ 175
    Transmission oil, checking ________ 211
    Transmission oil, grade ___________ 287
    Transmission, automatic __________ 165
    Transmission, manual ____________ 164
    Transporting the car _____________ 199
    Treadwear indicators ____________ 246
    Trip computer ___________________ 92
    Trip meter ______________________ 92
    Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC _____ 269
    Trunk lid, driving when open _______ 196
    Trunk lid, opening ________________ 53
    Turbo gauge ____________________ 90

    U
    Uniform tire quality grading ________
    Upholstery care _________________
    Upholstery, cleaning _____________
    Useful tips on night driving ________
    Useful tips on starting ____________

    247
    262
    262
    197
    155

    V
    Vanity mirror ___________________
    Vehicle Data Collection ___________
    Vehicle identification number ______
    Vehicle recovery ________________

    134
    278
    293
    199

    303

    W
    Warning labels ____________________ 8
    Warning lights ___________________ 84
    Warning triangle ________________ 102
    Warnings and messages on SID,
    Convertible ____________________ 73
    Washer fluid ___________________ 219
    Washer jets ____________________ 220
    Washers ______________________ 103
    Washing ______________________ 263
    Washing a Convertible ___________ 264
    Waxing and polishing ____________ 266
    Wear indicators, tires _____________ 246
    What Will You See After an Airbag
    Inflates? ______________________ 43
    Wheel replacement ______________ 249
    Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 290
    When it is time for new tires _______ 245
    Windshield washers _____________ 103
    Windshield wipers _______________ 103
    Wing mirrors ___________________ 124
    Winter driving __________________ 187
    Winter tires ____________________ 256
    Wiper blades ___________________ 219
    Wipers ________________________ 103

    X
    Xenon headlights ________________ 222
    Xenon headlights, head light levelling _ 99



  • Page 304

    93_U S_M 07.book Page 304 W ednesday,A pril12,2006 9:30 A M

    304

    Notes

    Notes






Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Saab 9-3 - 2007 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Holen Sie sich Ihr Benutzerhandbuch per E-Mail

Geben Sie Ihre E-Mail-Adresse ein, um das Handbuch zu erhalten von Saab 9-3 - 2007 in der Sprache / Sprachen: Englisch als Anhang in Ihrer E-Mail.

Das Handbuch ist 26,98 mb groß.

 

Sie erhalten das Handbuch in Ihrer E-Mail innerhalb von Minuten. Wenn Sie keine E-Mail erhalten haben, haben Sie wahrscheinlich die falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben oder Ihre Mailbox ist zu voll. Darüber hinaus kann es sein, dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe für E-Mails empfangen kann.

Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info